diff options
| author | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2007-08-20 00:47:43 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2007-08-20 00:47:43 +0000 |
| commit | ecba2fb228fa7ad92c06db0f761d203e1eba2f0d (patch) | |
| tree | 2a116a9de4a18efd569f507dc0b2438ed943debf | |
| parent | a1ee43bf7ca4935ff646b317ef3bdb6a93fc7e1b (diff) | |
rm latex2e-html, license unclear+unmaintained
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@4769 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
248 files changed, 0 insertions, 9143 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/LaTeX-info.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/LaTeX-info.html deleted file mode 100644 index c6167c134fd..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/LaTeX-info.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>About Help On LaTeX</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> - -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">About Help on LaTeX</font></h1> - -<p>These files originated from Help on LaTeX, Version 1.01, 9 Feb 94, -which can be accessed from the -<a href="externals.html">"Other on-line LaTeX Information" Page</a>. -That, in turn, was derived by Norm Walsh from a VMS help file provided -by George Greenwade. </p> - -<p>The current files are a revised and extended version created by -<a href="http://www.giss.nasa.gov/staff/sgreen/">Sheldon Green</a>. -He added much information, especially about those parts of LaTeX -he used most, equations and mathematical symbols. Whether or not -commands are -<a href="fragile.html">fragile</a> has been added in most cases. -Illustrative examples of usage have been added in several instances. -The hypertext linking has been greatly improved. -Each file contains a revision date.</p> - -<p>Much of the new information has been taken from Lamport, "A Document -Preparation System:Latex," and from comp.text.tex newsgroup postings. </p> - -<p>Since the death of Dr. Green in December 1995, no substantial -changes have been to these files. Relatively minor changes have -been made affecting page formatting (HTML) of the files or -as the result of verifying the external links.</p> - -<p>This set of files is also available as a -<a href="ltx-tar.html">Unix compressed tar file</a> -which can be installed locally to provide faster access.</p> - -<hr> -Return to the <a href="index.html">Introduction</a>.<br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>.<br> - -<hr> - -<address> -Page revised: 1997:01:14, RBS -</address> - -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/baselineskip.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/baselineskip.html deleted file mode 100644 index 332a6425b99..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/baselineskip.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \baselineskip and \baselinestretch</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\baselineskip \baselinestretch</font></h1> -<tt>\baselineskip</tt> is a <a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">length command</a> -which specifies the minimum space between the botton of two successive -lines in a paragraph. -Its value may be automatically reset by LaTeX, for example, by font changes -in the text. -The value used for an entire paragraph is the value -in effect at the blank line or command which ends the paragraph unit. -<p> -<tt>\baselinestretch</tt> scales the value of <tt>\baselineskip</tt>. Its -default value is 1.0 but it may be reset with a -<a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\renewcommand</tt></a> command. If one wants -to change the spacing in a document one should reset <tt>\baselinestretch</tt> -and <strong>not</strong> <tt>\baselineskip</tt> as the latter may be reset -automatically by LaTeX to account for local variations in the text, but it -is always scaled by the former. In principle, "double spacing" can be obtained -by <tt>\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{2}</tt>. - -<hr> -See also: <A href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</A><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/boldmath.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/boldmath.html deleted file mode 100644 index 368f30f40eb..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/boldmath.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \boldmath</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\boldmath</font></h1> -The <tt>\boldmath</tt> <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> switches -to a bold math italic font; this causes letters, numbers, and -<strong>most</strong> symbols used in math mode to be set in a bold type. -<p> -(In <a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e</a> <strong>everything</strong> in the -formula is set in a bold font.) -<p> -The <tt>\unboldmath</tt> <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> switches -back to the normal math italic font. -<p> -Note, these commands should <strong>not</strong> be used in math mode. -Thus the scope of the <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> must -include the math mode expressions to which you want it to apply. -<p> -If you -want only part of a formula to be bold an -<a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a> command is useful: -<pre> - <tt><a href="ltx-115.html#math">\(</a> Regular formula + - \mbox{\boldmath$ Bold part$} = 0 <a href="ltx-115.html#math">\)</a></tt> -</pre> -<p> -Both <tt>\boldmath</tt> and <tt>\unboldmath</tt> commands are -<a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. -<hr> -Related topics -<ul> -<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a> -<li><a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a> -<li><a href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</a> and <a href="ltx-177.html">Styles</a> -</ul> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jul 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/caption.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/caption.html deleted file mode 100644 index 357cdf7892a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/caption.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,19 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX caption</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\caption</font></h1> -<tt>\caption[lst-entry]{Text of table caption}</tt> is used to -generate a caption for a figure or a table. -<p> -the optional <tt>lst-entry</tt> may be used to generate an -entry for a list of figures or tables. -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-43.html">picture environment</a><br> -See also <a href="ltx-67.html">table environment</a><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/declarations.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/declarations.html deleted file mode 100644 index 06631b5f7a1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/declarations.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Declarations</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Declarations</font></h1> -A declaration is a LaTeX command that does not act on an argument, -but which changes the way LaTeX prints the following text or which changes -the value or meaning of some <a href="ltx-17.html">command</a> or -<a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a>. - -<h2>Scope</h2> -The <em>scope</em> of a declaration begins with the declaration -command itself and is ended by the first right -brace (<tt>}</tt>) or <tt>\end{}</tt> command whose matching -left brace (<tt>{</tt>) or <tt>\begin{}</tt> precedes the declaration. -However, the <tt>\begin{}</tt> and <tt>\end{}</tt> of environments -you create yourself, for example, with the -<a href="ltx-19.html"><tt>\newenvironment</tt></a> command, do not -count for calculating the scope of declarations. -<p> -The declaration is in effect within its scope, exept that it may be -countermanded by another declaration whose scope is a subset. -<p> -However, some declarations are <em>global</em>; they are in effect until -countermanded by another declaration. They include -<ul> -<li><a href="ltx-195.html"><tt>\addtocounter</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-271.html"><tt>\newcounter</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-310.html"><tt>\setcounter</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-137.html"><tt>\pagenumbering</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-140.html"><tt>\thispagestyle</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-87.html"><tt>\newlength</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-277.html"><tt>\newsavebox</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-20.html"><tt>\newtheorem</tt></a> -</ul> -<p> -Every declaration has an <a href="ltx-27.html">environment</a> of the -same name. If <tt>\decl</tt> is a declaration command, then -<pre> <tt>{\decl .... }</tt></pre> -can also be effected by -<pre> <tt>\begin{decl} .... \end{decl}</tt></pre> -If the declaration takes arguments these become additional arguments of the -<tt>\begin</tt> command. -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 Nov 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ellipses.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ellipses.html deleted file mode 100644 index b2110d115cf..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ellipses.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,23 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Ellipses</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Ellipses</font></h1> -Ellipses (three dots) can be produced by the following commands -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-256.html"><tt>\ldots</tt></A> horizontally at bottom of line -<li><a href="ltx-207.html"><tt>\cdots</tt></a> horizontally center of line - (math mode only) -<li><A href="ltx-218.html"><tt>\ddots</tt></A> diagonal (math mode only) -<li><A href="ltx-340.html"><tt>\vdots</tt></A> vertical (math mode only) -</ul> - -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>, -<A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>.<br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 25 April 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/emph.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/emph.html deleted file mode 100644 index 66153686893..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/emph.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \emph</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\emph</font></h1> -This is LaTeX2e. -<p> -The <tt>\emph</tt> command is considered more -suitable for short stretches of emphasized text. -Like the LaTeX 2.09 <a href="ltx-221.html"><tt>\em</tt></a> command -it toggles between italics and Roman typefaces. -A typical use would be -<pre> - <tt>This is \emph{emphasized text}.</tt> -</pre> -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</a>, - <a href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</a><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<address> -<hr> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 11 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ensuremath.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ensuremath.html deleted file mode 100644 index 10f0dea1611..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ensuremath.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,23 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX2e \ensuremath</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\ensuremath (<strong>LaTeX2e</strong>)</font></h1> -<tt>\ensuremath{Text set in math mode}</tt> -<p> -The argument of the <tt>\ensuremath</tt> command is always set in -math mode, regardless of the current mode. Note that math mode -is <strong>not</strong> specifically invoked in the argument of -the <tt>\ensuremath</tt> command. -<p> -Thus <tt>\ensuremath{$\alpha^2+\beta^2$}</tt> is <strong>not -correct</strong>.<br> -The <strong>correct</strong> form is <tt>\ensuremath{\alpha^2+\beta^2}</tt>. -<p> -See also <a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\newcommand</tt></a> -<hr> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a><br> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 4 May 1995. -</address> -</body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/externals.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/externals.html deleted file mode 100644 index d1cbde94b8a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/externals.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,189 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Other On-line LaTeX Information</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> - -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Other on-line LaTeX information</font></h1> - -<hr> - -<h2>Prime Sources</h2> -<dl> - <dt><b><big><a href="http://www.tug.org/">TeX Users Group Home - Page</a></big></b> - <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 --> - - <dt><b><big>The Comprehensive Tex Archive Network (CTAN)</big></b> - <dd>Virtually all TeX, LaTeX, and related software and documentation can - be obtained from CTAN, which has multiple ftp mirror sites. - See for example these - <a href="http://ctan.tug.org/ctan/">US</a> and - <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 --> - <a href="http://www.tex.ac.uk/">UK</a> sites. - <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 --> - - <dt><b><big><a href="http://www.tex.ac.uk/ctan/latex/">LaTeX - home page</a></big></b> - <dd>Doesn't seem to have been updated since 1994. - <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 --> - -</dl> - -<hr> - -<H2>Packages for Publications</H2> -<dl> - <dt><b><big>REVTeX</big></b> - <dd>The <a href="http://www.aip.org/">American Institute of Physics</a> - accepts manuscripts for several of its journals in - <a href="http://www.aip.org/aip/pubserv.html">REVTeX</a>. - <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 --> - - <dt><b><big>AASTeX</big></b> - <dd>Similarly, the <a href="http://aas.org/">American Astronomical Society</a> - accepts manuscripts for several of its journals in - <a href="http://www.aas.org/publications/aastex/">AASTeX</a>. - <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 --> - - The <a href="ftp://aas.org/pubs/aastex-misc/FAQ">AASTeX FAQ</a> - might be helpful. - <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 --> - - Astronomers will also find - <a href="http://www.stsci.edu/software/TeX.html">TeX and LaTeX Macros - for astronomers</a> from STScI to be useful; - Particularly good is Chris Biemesderfer's - <a href="http://www.stsci.edu/ftp/software/tex/ltxcrib/">LaTeX - Command Summary</a>. - <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 --> - - <dt><b><big>AMSTeX</big></b> - <dd>The <a href="http://www.ams.org/">American Mathematical Society</a> - has their own macro package, - <a href="http://www.ams.org/tex/home.html">AMSTeX</a>. - <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 --> - -</dl> - - - - - -<hr> - -<h2>More Resources and Links</h2> - - -<p>The UK TeX Users' Group's -<a href="http://www.cogs.susx.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?introduction=yes">FAQ -Page</a> is searchable and up-to-date.</p> - <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 --> - - -<p><a href="http://www.emerson.emory.edu/services/latex/latex2e/latex2e_toc.html">LaTeXe help 1.4</a> -is available from Emory Univ.</p> - <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 --> - - -<p><a href="http://www.cis.ohio-state.edu/~gurari/TeX4ht/mn.html">TeX4ht: -TeX and LaTeX for Hypertext</a> -is available from Ohio State.</p> - <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 --> - - -<p><a href="http://www.am.qub.ac.uk/latex/latex_1.html">Hypertext information -similar to the current set of files</a> also originated from VMS -help files.</p> - -<p><a href="http://stkwww.fys.ruu.nl:8000/posters/hogeveen/recommend/astdoc.html">Aspects of publishing with TeX and LaTeX</a> -is an introduction to the philosophy of TeX and LaTeX.</p> - <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 --> - -<p><a href="http://club.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/LaTeX_intro.html">Text Processing Using LaTeX</a> -from Cambridge Univ. Engineering Dept. includes excellent beginning -and advanced hypertext manuals as well as information in other formats.</p> - <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 --> - -<p>Macintosh users will want to take a look at Gary Gray's -<a href="http://www.esm.psu.edu/mac-tex/">TeX/LaTeX Software for the -Macintosh</a>, with pointers to many tools for dealing with LaTeX -and what's new listings.</p> - <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 --> - -<p>For those with less experience with LaTeX, good introductory material -includes:</p> - -<ul> - <li><A href="http://riceinfo.rice.edu/Computer/Documents/Classes/Unix/class/class.html"> - Intro to LaTeX</a>, - a short course at Rice University. - <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 --> - - <li><a href="http://www.maths.tcd.ie/~dwilkins/LaTeXPrimer/Index.html">Getting - Started with LaTeX</a> by David Wilkins, Trinity College, Dublin. - <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 --> - - <li><a href="http://zen.efs.mq.edu.au/doc/LatexTutorial/LatexTutorial.html">LaTeX Tutorial</a> from Macquarie University. - <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 --> - - <li><a href="http://www.cs.stir.ac.uk/guides/latex/guide.html">Document - Preparation with LaTeX</a> from the Univ. of Sterling, UK. - <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 --> - -</ul> - - - - - - -<p>The <a href="http://www.loria.fr/services/tex/">(La)TeX navigator</a> -from LORIA in France is an excellent source of documentation and pointers -to other resources. The site is also in available in -<a href="http://www.loria.fr/services/tex/english/index.html">English</a> and -<a href="http://www.loria.fr/services/tex/german/index.html">Deutsch</a>.</p> - <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 --> - -<p>Lots of -<a href="http://www.cs.csubak.edu/Doc/Tex/welcome.html">documentation</a>, -mostly PostScript, is available from King Lee at Cal State-Bakersfield.</p> - <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 --> - -<p><a href="http://www.stat.ucla.edu/develop/tex/index.html">TeX -and Friends</a>, from UCLA, is mostly (compressed) PostScript files.</p> - <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 --> - -<p><a href="http://www.cl.cam.ac.uk/TeXdoc/TeXdocs.html">Tex-related -documents</a> from Cambridge Univ.; includes TeX Users Group newsletter -and many documents (mostly in dvi format).</p> - <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 --> - - - - -<p>The Usenet newsgroup -<b><a href="news:comp.text.tex">comp.text.tex</a></b> can be a good -source of information and help (but read the FAQ before posting).</p> - -<p>Of course, there's always -<a href="http://www.yahoo.com/Computers_and_Internet/Desktop_Publishing/TeX/">Yahoo</a>.</p> - <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 --> - - - - - - -<hr> - -Go back to the <a href="index.html">Introduction</a><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a><br> - -<hr> - -<address> -Links verified: RBS, 1998-05-14, 05-21<br> -</address> - -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/fonts2e.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/fonts2e.html deleted file mode 100644 index 1bc6a6108cf..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/fonts2e.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX2e Font Selection</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Font Selection (LaTeX2e)</font></h1> -The following methods for font selection may -<strong>not</strong> be used in math mode. -<p> -Type styles are specified by three <em>independent</em> components. If -a font (the combination of these three components) is chosen which is -not available, LaTeX will issue a warning and substitute a similar font. -<p> -<ul> -<li>series -<li>family -<li>shape -</ul> -These may be chosen by either a command so that the choice applies -to the text within the command argument, or by a -<a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> which obeys the usual -rules for scope. The two forms are -<pre> - <strong>declaration</strong> <strong>command</strong> - - \mdseries \textmd Medium Series - \bfseries \textbf Boldface Series - - \rmfamily \textrm Roman Family - \sffamily \textsf Sans Serif Family - \ttfamily \texttt Typewrite Family - - \upshape \textup Upright Shape - \itshape \textit Italic Shape - \slshape \textsl Slanted Shape - \scshape \textsc Small Caps Shape - \normalfont \textnormal Normal Style -</pre> -The <tt>\normalfont</tt> declaration sets series, family, and shape to -the main text font of the document. -<p> -When using the Typewriter Family, words will be hyphenated only where -permitted by a <tt><a href="ltx-182.html">\-</a></tt> command. -<hr> -See also Typeface <a href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</a><br> -See also <a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 19 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/fragile.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/fragile.html deleted file mode 100644 index 5252c66ffa7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/fragile.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,59 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX fragile commands</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Fragile and Robust commands</font></h1> -LaTeX commands are either <em>robust</em> or <em>fragile</em>. Fragile -commands need special care <em>if they are part of a moving argument</em>. -<p> -Arguments to some LaTeX commands are called <em>moving arguments</em> because -they may be "moved" to other places in the document. For example, the argument -of <a href="ltx-141.html">Sectioning comands</a> may be moved -to the <a href="ltx-170.html">Table of Contents</a>. Other examples -of moving arguments include: -<ul> -<li>arguments of <a href="caption.html"><tt>\caption</tt></a> commands -<li>terminal input and output, <a href="ltx-174.html"><tt>\typeout</tt></a> - and <a href="ltx-175.html"><tt>\typein</tt></a> -<li>commands that <a href="ltx-264.html">produce page headings</a> -<li>the <a href="ltx-91.html">Letter Environment</a> -<li>the <a href="ltx-324.html"><tt>\thanks</tt></a> command -<li> an <tt>@</tt> expression in the <a href="ltx-202.html">Array</a> or - <a href="ltx-68.html">Tabular</a> environment -</ul> -A fragile command that appears in a moving argument must be preceded by a -<tt>\protect</tt> command. The <tt>\protect</tt> applies only to the -immediately following command; if arguments of this command also contain -fragile commands, the latter must be protected with their own <tt>\protect</tt>. - -<h2>Some fragile commands</h2> -The following list is not exhaustive, but illustrates the kind of commands -which are fragile -<ul> -<li>All commands that have an optional argument are fragile. -<li>Environments delimited by <tt>\begin ... \end</tt> are fragile. -<li><a href="ltx-421.html">Display math</a> environment delimited by - <tt>\[ ... \]</tt> -<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math environment</a> <tt>\( ... \)</tt> - <ul><li>However, <tt>$ ... $</tt> is robust</ul> -<li>Line breaks, <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> -<li><a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> commands -<li><a href="ltx-231.html"><tt>\footnote</tt></a> commands -</ul> - -<h2>Some robust commands</h2> -In general, commands which change <a href="ltx-176.html">Type face or -Type style</a> are robust. -<p> -<a href="ltx-86.html">Length commands</a> are robust and should -<strong>not</strong> be preceded by a <tt>\protect</tt> command. Nor -should a <tt>\protect</tt> command be used in the argument to -<a href="ltx-195.html"><tt>\addtocounter</tt></a> or -<a href="ltx-310.html"><tt>\setcounter</tt></a> command. -<hr> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/frenchsp.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/frenchsp.html deleted file mode 100644 index 222bd8b8452..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/frenchsp.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,16 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \frenchspacing</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\frenchspacing</font></h1> -The <tt>\frenchspacing</tt> <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> -tells LaTeX <strong>not</strong> to insert extra space at the end of -sentences. This style is common in non-English languages. -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/index.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/index.html deleted file mode 100644 index cf271375d3d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/index.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,98 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head> -<title>Hypertext Help with LaTeX</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" -text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> - -<h1><font color="#cc0000">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font></h1> - -<p>LaTeX is a word processing (or, more accurately, a typesetting) -program. It typesets a file of text using the TeX program and -the LaTeX Macro package for TeX. It does this by processing an -input file containing the text of a document with interspersed -commands that describe how the text should be formatted.</p> - -<p>Unike many word processing programs, which concentrate on formatting -material on the page (often called WYSIWYG, for "what you see is what -you get"), LaTeX concentrates on "content." -LaTeX is a Generalized Mark-up Language macro package for the TeX -typesetting program. That is, one specifies -the structure: sections, title, appendix, authors' names, etc., -which bear little relation to how this will look on a page. -That is determined by the -<a href="ltx-22.html">document style</a> -files (*.sty); -standard ones are provided for such things as articles, reports, -books, and letters. However, these style files may be readily replaced -by others, giving a completely different look. -Of course, it is possible in LaTeX to specify much about -the physical layout, but this tends -to be done with commands that define things like space between lines or -amount to indent paragraphs rather than by positioning each piece of text -on the page as is typical in WYSIWYG systems.</p> - -<p>LaTeX produces -as output a Device Independent (*.dvi) file that contains -commands that can be translated into commands for a variety of output -devices. It also produces a transcript or log (*.log) file -that contains summary -information and diagnostic messages for any errors discovered in the -input file and an auxiliary (*.aux) file which contains cross -refererence information for Tables, citations, etc. It is sometimes -necessary to run LaTeX twice so that it has correct cross reference -information, especially when modifications have changed the numbering.</p> - -<p>These hypertext help files are meant to provide reference information -for those with some familiarity with LaTeX. They are not an introduction -or tutorial.</p> - - -<dl> - <dt><big><b><a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a></b></big> - <dd>Links to help by subject, LaTeX command, or environment - <p></p> - - <dt><big><b><a href="versions.html">Notes on Versions</a></b></big> - <dd>LaTeX 2.09 and LaTeX2e - <p></p> - - <dt><big><b><a href="refs.html">Reference Books</a></b></big> - <p></p> - - <dt><big><b><a href="LaTeX-info.html">About these files</a></b></big> - <dd>Plus info on how to obtain them via ftp - <p></p> - - <dt><big><b><a href="externals.html">LaTeX resources on the Web</a></b></big> - <dd>Including REVTeX, AMSTeX, and AASTeX - <p></p> - - <dt><big><b><a href="mirror.html">Mirrors of this site</a></b></big> - <dd>Copies of these files which might provide faster access - <p></p> - -</ul> - - -<p> </p> - - -<p>These pages were originally created by -<a href="http://www.giss.nasa.gov/staff/sgreen/">Sheldon Green</a>, -who passed away in December 1995. -Updates subsequent to Dr. Green's death have been made only for -purposes of page formatting and link verification. -Please contact -<a href="mailto:webmaster@giss.nasa.gov">webmaster@giss.nasa.gov</a> -if you are interested in assisting with maintenance and updates to -these pages.</p> - -<hr> - -<address> -Updated: 1998-12-03, RBS -</address> - -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/input.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/input.html deleted file mode 100644 index 4246ee64946..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/input.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,95 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head> -<title>Input to LaTeX</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> - -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Input to LaTeX</font></h1> -Input to LaTeX is plain text (ascii) which includes both the text of the -document and also formatting commands. It is possible to -<a href="ltx-165.html">split the input</a> into several files using: -<ul> -<li><a href="ltx-245.html"><tt>\include</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-248.html"><tt>\input</tt></a> -</ul> -<p> -Space characters separate words. Two space characters in a row are -equivalent to a single space character. The end of line is also -equivalent to a space character. (However, a percent sign, -<a href="ltx-434.html"><tt>%</tt></a>, can end a line without -generating a space character.) Generally, space characters at the beginning -of a line are ignored. -<p> -An empty or blank line between two lines of text defines -<a href="ltx-111.html">a new paragraph</a>. -Two blank lines are equivalent to one. -<h2>Special Characters</h2> -The following ten characters are <a href="ltx-164.html">Special LaTeX -Characters</a>: -<pre><tt> $ & % # _ { } ~ ^ \ </tt> -</pre> -If entered directly in the input they cause LaTeX to do something special. -You can get the following seven of them into your document by simply -preceding them with a backslash (<tt>\</tt>): -<pre><tt> $ & % # _ { } </tt> -</pre> -To get the other three (<tt> ~ ^ \ </tt>) in -your output requires <a href="ltx-164.html">more work</a>. - -<h2>LaTex Commands</h2> -Commands take one of two forms -<ul><li>a backslash (<tt>\</tt>) followed by a single special character - <li>a bacslash (<tt>\</tt>) followed by a string of letters -</ul> -The second case is case-sensitive; -<a href="ltx-405.html"><tt>\Gamma</tt></a> is different from -<a href="ltx-405.html"><tt>\gamma</tt></a>. -These commands are terminated by a nonletter, i.e., a blank, a number, -a punctuation mark or special character. -<p> -Commands may have mandatory arguments, which are input in braces -(<tt>{}</tt>). -They may also have optional arguments, which are input in square brackets -(<tt>[]</tt>). -<p> -For commands which produce text a trailing blank may be interpreted as the -end of the command, which does not automatically create a space, so - you may have to do something to create an -<a href="ltx-431.html">interword space</a> after this text. - -<h2><a name="structure">Structure of Input</a></h2> -LaTeX input normally begins with a -<a href="ltx-22.html"><tt>\documentstyle</tt></a> command. (In LaTeX2e -this is replaced with a <a href="versions.html"><tt>\documentclass</tt></a> -command.) -<p> -The beginning of the document text follows a <tt>\begin{document}</tt> -command. -<p> -Input between the <tt>\documentstyle</tt> and <tt>\begin{document}</tt> -is called the <em>preamble</em> and typically contains <a href="ltx-17.html">new -command definitions</a>, information for the -<a href="ltx-263.html">title</a>, <a href="declarations.html">declarations</a> -which affect things like <a href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</a>, etc. -<p> -The document text (and generally also the LaTeX input) is terminated by a -<tt>\end{document}</tt> command. -<p> -It is possible to obtain some of the input from <a href="ltx-165.html">external -files</a>, i.e., those which are not the main file input to the LaTeX program. -<hr> -See also -<ul> -<li><a href="ltx-165.html">Splitting the input</a> -<li><a href="ltx-164.html">Special Characters</a> -<li><a href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</a> -<li><a href="ltx-111.html">Making Paragraphs</a> -<li><a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a> -</ul> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 30 Oct 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/item.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/item.html deleted file mode 100644 index 634cf6ae42f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/item.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \item</title> -</head><body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\item</font></h1> -<tt>\item[label] Text for this item</tt> -<p> -The <tt>\item</tt> command starts a new item in a -<a href="lists.html">List Environment</a>. The optional argument -<tt>label</tt> generates the item label; if not given a default -label is used. -<p> -A blank line preceding an <tt>\item</tt> command has no effect. -<p> -In order to use brackets as part of the <tt>label</tt> (for example, -in the <a href="ltx-31.html">Description Environment</a>) they must -be enclosed in braces: -<pre> - <tt>\item[{[}item 1{]}] This is the first item</tt> -</pre> -The <tt>\item</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a>, - <a href="lists.html">Lists</a><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/lefteqn.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/lefteqn.html deleted file mode 100644 index 3e0af56d138..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/lefteqn.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \lefteqn</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\lefteqn</font></h1> -<p> -<p><pre> - <tt>\lefteqn{eqn}</tt> -</pre> - prints <tt>eqn</tt> in display math style, but pretends that it has - zero width. It is typicaly used within an - <a href="ltx-223.html"><tt>Eqnarray</tt></a> environment for - displaying long equations that require multiple lines. -<p> -A typical use might be -<pre> - <tt>\begin{eqnarray} - \lefteqn{\int_0^<a href="ltx-407.html">\infty</a> some expression =} \\ - & & some terms <a href="ltx-181.html">\\</a> - & & <a href="ltx-265.html">\mbox{}</a> + more terms - \end{eqnarray}</tt> -</pre> -Note that the empty <a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox{}</tt></a> is so LaTeX -knows that the following <tt>+</tt> is a binary operator, and is not -attached to the first of the "more terms" as a unary operator. -<hr> -Related topics -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A> -<li><a href="ltx-202.html">Array Environment</a> -<li><a href="ltx-223.html">Eqnarray Environment</a> -<li><a href="ltx-224.html">Equation Environment</a> -<li><a href="ltx-421.html">Displaymath Environment</a> -<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a> -</ul> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/lists.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/lists.html deleted file mode 100644 index 4912c395d99..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/lists.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,58 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Lists</title> -</head><body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Lists</font></h1> -LaTeX provides several List-Making Environments -These may be nested up to four deep. -<p> - -<p>The items in the list are given by <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> -commands. -A blank line before an <tt>\item</tt> command has no effect. - -<h2>List-Making Enviroments</h2> -<DL> -<dt><h3><a href="ltx-31.html">Description</a></h3> -<dd>Typically used for giving short definitions or descriptions; the -<tt>label</tt> argument of the <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command -generally giving the term being described (although it <strong>can</strong> -be left blank, it will look strange). The text of the -<a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command is indented. - -<dt><h3><a href="ltx-222.html">Enumerate</a></h3> -<dd>Typically used for numbered lists. -<a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a> for these lists are -provided by <tt>enumi, emumii, enumiii, enumiv</tt>, respectively, for the four -levels of nesting. - -<dt><h3><a href="ltx-250.html">Itemize</a></h3> -<dd>Typically used for unnumbered lists. The default -<tt>label</tt> argument of the <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command -produces "tick-marks" which vary by level of nesting, generally -"bullets" for the first level. - -<dt><h3><a href="ltx-260.html">List</a></h3> -<dd>Produces a list of labeled items and has required arguments that -allow a great deal of flexibility in layout. It is generally used -to define new environments with the -<a href="ltx-19.html"><tt>\newenvironment</tt></a> command, or to -set up one-of-a-kind lists. - -<dt><h3><a href="trivlist.html">Trivlist</a></h3> -<dd>Like the List Environment, using the currently defined values of -list-making parameters; normally used to define an environment with a -single item, with an <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command -as part of the environment definition. - -</DL> -<hr> -See also <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a><br> -See also <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a>, -<a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 18 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-111.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-111.html deleted file mode 100644 index 56c6c8bb6be..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-111.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Making Paragraphs</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Making Paragraphs</font></h1> -<p> - A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines -- lines - not containing even a <a href="ltx-434.html"><tt>%</tt></a> (comments). - A blank line should not appear where a new - paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode or in the argument - of a sectioning command. - -<H2>Subtopics</H2> -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-247.html">\indent</A> -<li><A href="ltx-280.html">\noindent</A> -<li><A href="ltx-293.html">\par</A> -</ul> -<hr> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-115.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-115.html deleted file mode 100644 index 539ef71c2a0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-115.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,82 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Math Formulas</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Math Formulas</font></h1> -<p> - There are four environments that put LaTeX in math mode: -<ul><li><a href="#math">math</a> (see below) - <li><a href="ltx-421.html">displaymath</a> - <li><a href="ltx-223.html">eqnarray</a> - <li><a href="ltx-224.html">equation</a> -</ul> - All four of these environments are typeset in math - <a href="ltx-130.html">mode</a>, using a math italic font and LaTeX - ideas about spacing in math mode. (See also <a href="mathfonts.html">math - fonts and styles</a>.) -<p> - The math environment is for formulas that - appear right in the text. The displaymath, eqnarray, and equation - environments are for formulas that apppear on their own line(s). - The math environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, but - displaymath, eqnarray, and equation environments can be used only - in paragraph mode. - -<h2><a name="math">Math environment</a></h2> - The math environment may be specified, as with all environments, by -<pre> - <tt>\begin{math} math equation \end{math}</tt> -</pre> - However, it is used so often that it has two equivalent shorter forms: -<pre> - <tt>\( math equation \)</tt> -</pre> -or just -<pre> - <tt>$ math equation $</tt> -</pre> -In <a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e</a> one can also use -<pre> - <tt><a href="ensuremath.html">\ensuremath</a>{math equation}</tt> -</pre> -<p> -For example, -<a href="ltx-179.html">Subscripts</a> and -<a href="ltx-180.html">superscripts</a> can only be used in math -mode. To include these in running text one could use: -<pre> - <tt>The formula for water is H$_2$O. - If the hypotenuse is $c$, then $c^2=a^2+b^2$.</tt> -</pre> -Note that it is standard to use math mode for letters, such as the -the <tt>$c$</tt> above, which are math variables. -<hr> -<h2>Related topics</H2> -<ul> -<li><a href="ltx-421.html">Displaymath environment</a> -<li><a href="ltx-223.html">Eqnarray environment</a> -<li><a href="ltx-224.html">Equation environment</a> -<p> -<li><a href="ltx-130.html">LaTeX Modes</a> -<p> -<li><a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a> -<li><A href="ltx-179.html">Subscripts</A> and - <a href="ltx-180.html">Superscripts</a> -<li><A href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</A> -<li><A href="ltx-118.html">Spacing in Math Mode</A> -<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A> -<li><a href="ellipses.html">Ellipses</a> -<p> -<li><a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a> for a bold math font -<li><a href="ltx-235.html"><tt>\frac</tt></a> for generating built-up fractions -<li><a href="stackrel.html"><tt>\stackrel</tt></a> for putting things above - each other -<li><a href="ltx-319.html"><tt>\sqrt</tt></a> for square (and nth) roots -</ul> -<p> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-117.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-117.html deleted file mode 100644 index 761ec951f03..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-117.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Math Symbols</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Math Symbols</font></h1> -<p> - TeX provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely to need. -<p> - Some, like <tt>+ - = < > | </tt> are obtained from the keyboard (the - first three can be used in any mode; the last three only in math mode). -<p> - Others are generated by LaTeX commands and - can generally be used only in math mode. - The following describe some of the useful symbols -<ul> - <li><a href="ltx-401.html#math">Accents</a> - <li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a> (math mode) - <li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational operators</a> (math mode) - <li><a href="ltx-403.html">Delimiters</a> (parenthesis-like objects; math mode) - <li><a href="ltx-405.html">Greek letters</a> (math mode) - <li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a> - <li><a href="ltx-409.html">Math functions</a> (sin, cos, log, ... ; math mode) - <li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size math symbols</a> (sums, integrals, ... - ; math mode) -<p> - <li><a href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</a> -<p> - <li><a href="ltx-235.html"><tt>\frac</tt></a> generates fractions (math mode) - <li><a href="ltx-319.html"><tt>\sqrt</tt></a> generates n-th root symbol - (math mode) - <li><a href="stackrel.html"><tt>\stackrel</tt></a> places one item above - another (math mode) -<p> - <li><a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a> for a bold math font -</ul> - -<hr> -See also <a href="mathfonts.html">Math Fonts and Styles</a><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jul 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-118.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-118.html deleted file mode 100644 index bd64652c6ee..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-118.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Spacing in Math Mode</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Spacing in Math Mode</font></h1> -<p> - In a math environment, LaTeX ignores the spaces you type and puts in - the spacing that it thinks is best. LaTeX formats mathematics the way - it's done in mathematics texts. If you want different spacing, LaTeX - provides the following four commands for use in math mode: -<ul> -<li><a href="ltx-183.html"><tt>\;</tt></a> - a thick space -<li><a href="ltx-184.html"><tt>\:</tt></a> - a medium space -<li><a href="ltx-185.html"><tt>\,</tt></a> - a thin space -<li><a href="ltx-186.html"><tt>\!</tt></a> - a negative thin space -</ul> -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>, - <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a><br> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jul 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-119.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-119.html deleted file mode 100644 index 9e0fb80d330..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-119.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Math Miscellany</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Math Miscellany</font></h1> - -The math symbols <tt>< ></tt> and <tt>|</tt> are used only in math mode. -Note that left and right angle brackets (which are somewhat taller than -< and >) can be obtained with -<a href="ltx-403.html"><tt>\langle</tt> and <tt>\rangle</tt></a> commands. -<p> -The single right quotation mark, <tt>'</tt>, produces a prime in math mode. -You can also use <a href="ltx-407.html"><tt>\prime</tt></a>. - -<H2>Also see</H2> -<ul> -<li><a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a> font -<li><A href="ltx-207.html"><tt>\cdots</tt></A> (centered ellipsis) -<li><A href="ltx-218.html"><tt>\ddots</tt></A> (diagonal ellipsis) -<li><A href="ltx-235.html"><tt>\frac</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-256.html"><tt>\ldots</tt></A> (ellipsis) -<li><A href="ltx-287.html"><tt>\overbrace</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-288.html"><tt>\overline</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-319.html"><tt>\sqrt</tt></A> -<li><a href="stackrel.html"><tt>\stackrel</tt></a> putting - things above other things -<li><A href="ltx-335.html"><tt>\underbrace</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-336.html"><tt>\underline</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-340.html"><tt>\vdots</tt></A> (vertical ellipsis) -</ul> -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>, - <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a>, - <a href="mathfonts.html">Math Fonts and Styles</a><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jul 1995. -</address> -</body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-13.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-13.html deleted file mode 100644 index 75e5148ba52..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-13.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,62 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Cross References</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Cross References</font></h1> -<p> - One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer - the reader to them, as in "See Figure 3 for more details." - -<H2>Sections, Equations, Tables, etc.</H2> -One can generate numbered references to anything for which LaTeX -maintains a <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a> by placing a -<a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> command -with some mnemonic name in the appropriate -<a href="ltx-27.html">environment</a>. The reference is then generated -by use of the <A href="ltx-303.html"><tt>\ref</tt></A> command with the -same mnemonic. -<p> -For example -<pre> - <tt>\begin{equation} - <A href="ltx-252.html">\label</a>{eqno1} - c <a href="ltx-404.html">\geq</a> <a href="ltx-319.html">\sqrt</a>{a^2+b^2+1} - \end{equation} - .... intervening text ... - From Eq.~(<A href="ltx-303.html">\ref</a>{eqno1}) we see ...</tt> -</pre> -Assuming that this is the first equation, -the last line will produce "From Eq. (1) we see ..." Note the -use of the <a href="ltx-143.html"><tt>~</tt></a> -to ensure that there is no line break between "Eq." and "(1)." -Also note that the <tt>\ref</tt> command produces only the number; -if you want the number to be in parentheses (as shown here) you have -to include them in your text. - -<h2>Bibliographic citations</h2> -Bibliographic citations work somewhat differently. The following -should be consulted: -<ul> -<li><a href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-73.html"><tt>\thebibligraphy</tt></a> -</ul> -<hr> -See also -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-303.html"><tt>\ref</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-291.html"><tt>\pageref</tt></A> -<p> -<li><a href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-73.html"><tt>\thebibligraphy</tt></a> -<p> -<li><a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a> -<li><a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a> -<li><a href="ltx-141.html">Sectioning</a> -</ul> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a><br> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 03 Nov 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-130.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-130.html deleted file mode 100644 index d6a99f89d07..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-130.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,67 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Modes</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Modes</font></h1> -<p> - When LaTeX is processing your input text, it is always in one of three - modes: -<ul> - <li><I>Paragraph</I> mode - <li><I>Math</I> mode - <li><I>Left-to-right</I> mode, called LR mode for short -</ul> - - LaTeX changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a - different level, though not all level changes produce mode changes. - Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or - when LaTeX is processing the argument of certain text-producing - commands. -<h2>Paragraph mode</h2> - Paragraph mode is the most common; it's the one LaTeX is in when - processing ordinary text. In that mode, LaTeX breaks your text into - lines and breaks the lines into pages. -<p> - There - are also several text-producing commands and environments for making a - box that put LaTeX in paragraph mode. The box made by one of these - commands or environments will be called a - <a href="ltx-294.html">parbox</a>. When LaTeX is in - paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in inner paragraph - mode. The normal paragraph mode, in which LaTeX starts out, is called - outer paragraph mode. - -<h2>Math mode</h2> - LaTeX is in math mode when it's generating a mathematical formula. It is - in math mode in the <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math</a>, - <a href="ltx-421.html">displaymath</a>, <a href="ltx-224.html">equation</a>, - and <a href="ltx-223.html"> eqnarray</a> environments. -<p> - In math mode letters are assumed to be math symbols and spaced accordingly. - Spaces in the input are ignored, except that spaces may be needed to - delineate the end of commands. - -<h2>LR mode</h2> - In LR mode, as in paragraph - mode, LaTeX considers the output that it produces to be a string of - words with spaces between them. In LR mode, unlike paragraph and math modes, - spaces are not ignored; an input space creates an output space. - However, unlike paragraph mode, LaTeX - keeps going from left to right; it never starts a new line in LR mode. - Even if you put a hundred words into an - <a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a>, LaTeX would keep - typesetting them from left to right inside a single box, and then - complain because the resulting box was too wide to fit on the line. -<p> - LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an - <a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a> command. - You can get it to enter a different mode inside the box - for example, - you can make it enter math mode to put a formula in the box. -<hr> -Also see <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a><br> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-131.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-131.html deleted file mode 100644 index 70e27e88524..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-131.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Page Styles</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Page Styles</font></h1> -<p> - The <tt>\documentstyle</tt> command determines the size and position of the - page's head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them. - -<H2>Subtopics</H2> -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-263.html"><tt>\maketitle</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-137.html"><tt>\pagenumbering</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-138.html"><tt>\pagestyle</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-140.html"><tt>\thispagestyle</tt></A> -<li><a href="ltx-329.html"><tt>\title</tt></a> -</ul> -<hr> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 17 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-137.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-137.html deleted file mode 100644 index 59134f72b88..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-137.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \pagenumbering</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\pagenumbering</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\pagenumbering{num_style}</tt> -<p> - - Specifies the style of page numbers. Possible values of num_style are: -<p> - -<ul> -<li><TT>arabic</TT> Arabic numerals -<li><TT>roman</TT> Lowercase roman numerals -<li><TT>Roman</TT> Uppercase roman numerals -<li><TT>alph</TT> Lowercase letters -<li><TT>Alph</TT> Uppercase letters -</ul> -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</a><br> -For page numbering, see <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br> -To refer to a page number in the text, see - <a href="ltx-291.html"><tt>\pageref</tt></a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 20 Oct 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-138.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-138.html deleted file mode 100644 index cd6fd4b67c7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-138.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \pagestyle</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\pagestyle</font></h1> - <tt>\pagestyle{option}</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\pagestyle</tt> <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> - changes the style from the current page on - throughout the remainder of your document. -<p> - The valid options are: -<ul> -<li><TT>plain</TT> Just a plain page number. -<li><TT>empty</TT> Produces empty heads and feet - no page numbers. -<li><TT>headings</TT> Puts running headings on each page. The document - style specifies what goes in the headings. -<li><TT>myheadings</TT> You specify what is to go in the heading with the - <tt>\markboth</tt> or the <tt>\markright</tt> commands. -</ul> -<hr> -See also -<A href="ltx-264.html"><tt>\markboth</tt> and - <tt>\markright</tt></A><br> -See also <a href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-140.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-140.html deleted file mode 100644 index 14882e118a0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-140.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,20 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \thispagestyle</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\thispagestyle</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\thispagestyle{option}</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\thispagestyle</tt> command works in the same manner as the - <a href="ltx-138.html"><tt>\pagestyle</tt></a> - command except that it changes the style for the current page only. -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 17 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-141.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-141.html deleted file mode 100644 index 41f2a04db26..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-141.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,70 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Sectioning</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Sectioning</font></h1> -<p> - Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into - units. The <a href="ltx-22.html">document style</a> determines which - sectioning commands are supported. They should be used with the - following heirarchy: - <ul> - <li><tt>\part</tt> - <li><tt>\chapter</tt> (report style only) - <li><tt>\section</tt> - <li><tt>\subsection</tt> - <li><tt>\subsubsection</tt> - <li><tt>\paragraph</tt> - <li><tt>\subparagraph</tt> - <li><tt>\subsubparagraph</tt> (milstd and book-form styles only) - <li><tt>\subsubsubparagraph</tt> (milstd and book-form styles only) - </ul> -<p> - The <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a> for each level is reset when the - level above is incremented (except chapters are numbered sequentially - regardless of the part). -<p> - All sectioning commands take the same general form: -<pre> - <tt>\chapter[optional]{title}</tt> - <a href="ltx-252.html">\label{lab}</a> <a href="ltx-434.html">%</a> optional, for cross referencing - text for this unit ... - ... -</pre> - In addition to providing the heading in the text, the mandatory - argument of the sectioning command can appear in two other places: -<ol> - <li>the table of contents - <li>the running head at the top of the page -</ol> - You may not want the same thing to appear in these other two places as - appears in the text heading. To handle this situation, the sectioning - commands have an optional argument that provides the text for these - other two purposes. -<p> -The <tt>title</tt> or <tt>optional</tt> title are moving arguments so -<a href="fragile.html">fragile</a> commands contained in these -arguments must be protected. -<p> - All the sectioning commands have *-forms that print a title, but do not - print a number with the title and do not incement the relevant - <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a> and do not make an entry in the - <a href="toc.html">table of contents</a>. -<p> - A blank line before or after a sectioning command has no effect. -<hr> -Related topics -<ul> -<li><a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> -<li><A href="ltx-142.html"><tt>\appendix</tt></A> -</ul> -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a>, - <a href="ltx-13.html">Cross References</a><br> -See also <a href="toc.html">Table of Contents</a><br> -Back to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 14 Jul 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-142.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-142.html deleted file mode 100644 index 843f696d7c4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-142.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,19 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \appendix</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\appendix</font></h1> - <tt>\appendix</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\appendix</tt> command changes the way sectional units are numbered. - It generates no text. However, <a href="ltx-141.html">section commands</a> - after the <tt>\appendix</tt> command are numbered accordingly. - -<hr> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 30 Oct 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-143.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-143.html deleted file mode 100644 index 12207070528..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-143.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,149 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head> -<title>Help On LaTeX Spaces and Boxes</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Spaces and Boxes</font></h1> - -<h2>"Visible" Spaces</h2> -You can generate a "visible" space, generally indicated as a small, squat -"u," and useful in didactic material by using the -<a href="ltx-342.html"><tt>\verb</tt></a> command or the -<a href="ltx-79.html"><tt>verbatim</tt></a> environment. - -<h2>Non-breaking Spaces</h2> -To generate a space where you do not want to allow a break for a new line use a -<tt>~</tt>. For example, -<pre> - <tt>... in Table~2 and Fig.~3 ...</tt> -</pre> - -<h2>Controlling Space in Text</h2> - -The ends of words and sentences are marked -in the input by one or more spaces. LaTeX -treats multiple spaces as if they were a single space. An end of line -is also equivalent to a space; however, you can end a line -<em>without</em> a space by using a -<a href="ltx-434.html"><tt>%</tt></a> (anything following the -<tt>%</tt> is considered to be -a comment). LaTeX generally ignores spaces at the beginning of lines. -<p> -Paragraphs are -delineated by a <em>blank line</em> -- one which does not contain even -comments (anything following a -<a href="ltx-434.html"><tt>%</tt></a> until the end of a line is -a comment). See also the <a href="ltx-293.html"><tt>\par</tt></a> -command. -<p> -LaTeX leaves extra space after punctuation, such as the period which -ends a sentence, -but, it uses a very simple rule (periods end sentences unless -they follow a capital letter) so -sometimes it needs a little help in determining when -this is required. (However, see -<a href="frenchsp.html"><tt>\frenchspacing</tt></a>.) -Use -<ul> -<li><a href="ltx-431.html"><tt>\<space></tt></a> to create an ordinary - interword space -<li><a href="ltx-432.html"><tt>\@</tt></a> before punctuation to force an "end of - sentence" space -</ul> -<p> -It is sometimes necessary to add a little additional space, such as between -consecutive single and double <a href="ltx-433.html">quotation marks</a>. -The <a href="ltx-185.html"><tt>\,</tt></a> command can be used for this purpose. -<p> -Also see -<ul> -<li><a href="ltx-430.html">Dashes</a> -<li><a href="ellipses.html">Ellipses</a> -<li><a href="ltx-433.html">Quotation Marks</a> -<li><a href="ltx-118.html">Spacing in Math Mode</a> -</ul> - -<h2>Spaces after Commands</h2> - -Most LaTeX commands consist of a <tt>\</tt> followed by a string of -letters. The end of such commands is indicated by a nonletter, i.e., -a number, a punctuation mark, a space, or the end of the line. If the -command produces text and you want a space to follow this text, you cannot -just leave a space after the command; that space is treated as the -end-of-command signal and several spaces are equivalent to one in LaTeX. -To generate a space after a text-producing command you can use -<a href="ltx-431.html"><tt>\<space></tt></a>. -<p> -For example -<pre> - <tt>I wrote this on <a href="ltx-330.html">\today</a> .</tt> -</pre> -generates "I wrote this on Jul 7, 1995." Note that the spaces -between <tt>\today</tt> and the period in the input do not generate -any space in the output. On the other hand, -<pre> - <tt>\today\ was a good day.</tt> -</pre> -or -<pre> - <tt>\today \ was a good day.</tt> -</pre> -will both produce "Jul 7, 1995 was a good day." The -<a href="ltx-431.html"><tt>\<space></tt></a> -here is necessary to produce space between the date and "was." -<p> -An alternatative is to use braces to terminate the command. For -example, <tt>\today{} was ...</tt> is equivalent to the above. - -<h3>Invisible commands</h3> -Some commands do not produce any output text. LaTeX treats these as -words of zero length and may try to leave spaces both before and -after this "word" which will generally produce an undesirable gap. -This can be avoided by attaching these commands directly to the -preceding word, i.e., leaving no spaces. - -<H2>Some commands which create or manipulate space</H2> -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-198.html">\addvspace</A> -<li><A href="ltx-206.html">\bigskip</A> -<li><A href="ltx-220.html">\dotfill</A> -<li><A href="ltx-238.html">\hfill</A> -<li><A href="ltx-240.html">\hrulefill</A> -<li><A href="ltx-241.html">\hspace</A> -<li><A href="ltx-266.html">\medskip</A> -<li><A href="ltx-306.html">\rule</A> -<li><A href="ltx-318.html">\smallskip</A> -<li><A href="ltx-345.html">\vfill</A> -<li><A href="ltx-347.html">\vspace</A> -</ul> -See also -<ul> -<li><a href="ltx-118.html">spacing in math mode</a> -</ul> - -<h2>Boxes</h2> -A box is an object which TeX treats as a single character; it is therefore -not broken across lines or pages. -<p> -The following commands create or manipulate boxes -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-226.html">\fbox</A> -<li><A href="ltx-237.html">\framebox</A> -<li><A href="ltx-262.html">\makebox</A> -<li><A href="ltx-265.html">\mbox</A> -<li><A href="ltx-277.html">\newsavebox</A> -<li><A href="ltx-294.html">\parbox</A> -<li><A href="ltx-302.html">\raisebox</A> -<li><A href="ltx-307.html">\savebox</A> -<li><A href="ltx-307.html">\sbox</A> -<li><A href="ltx-337.html">\usebox</A> -</ul> - -<hr> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-164.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-164.html deleted file mode 100644 index 342a3e4219d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-164.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,68 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Special Characters</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Special Characters</font></h1> -<p> - The following characters play a special role in LaTeX and are called - special printing characters, or simply special characters. -<pre> - # $ % & ~ _ ^ <tt>\</tt> { } -</pre> - Whenever you put one of these special characters into your file, you - are doing something special, as described below. -<p> - If you simply want the character to be - printed just as any other letter, include a <tt>\</tt> in front of the - character. For example, <tt>\$</tt> will produce $ in your output. -<br> - Exceptions to this rule: -<ul> -<li><tt>\</tt> itself because - <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> has its own - special meaning. Use <tt>$\backslash$</tt>. -<li><tt>~</tt> and <tt>^</tt> because <tt>\~</tt> and <tt>\^</tt> produce - <a href="ltx-401.html">accents</a>. Use - <a href="ltx-342.html"><tt>\verb</tt></a> or the - <a href="ltx-79.html">verbatim environment</a>. - -</ul> -<h2>#</h2> -The number (pound) sign is used to define use of arguments, for example, -in the <a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\newcommand</tt></a> command. -<h2>$</h2> -The dollar sign is used to delineate <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math</a> and -<a href="ltx-421.html">displaymath</a> Enviroments. -<h2>%</h2> -The percent sign is used to insert <a href="ltx-434.html">Comments</a> in the -input file, and to allow line breaks without generating a space. -<h2>&</h2> -The ampersand is used to separate items in the <a href="ltx-202.html">array</a> -and <a href="ltx-68.html">tabular</a> Enviroments. -<h2>~</h2> -The tilde generates a <a href="ltx-143.html">nonbreaking space</a> -To create a tilde in the output, use - <a href="ltx-342.html"><tt>\verb</tt></a> or the - <a href="ltx-79.html">verbatim environment</a> (or cheat by using - <tt>\~{}</tt>, i.e., placing a - <a href="ltx-401.html">tilde accent</a> over a "blank" letter). -<h2>_</h2> -The underscore is used to create <a href="ltx-179.html">subscripts</a> -<h2>^</h2>The carat (circumflex) symbol generates -<a href="ltx-180.html">superscripts</a>. - To create a carat in the output - use <a href="ltx-342.html"><tt>\verb</tt></a> or the - <a href="ltx-79.html">verbatim environment</a>. -<h2>\ , { , and }</h2> -The backslash and braces are used in -<a href="ltx-17.html">command</a> definitions, for enclosing -command arguments, and for delimiting scopes of -<a href="declarations.html">declarations</a>. -<hr> -See also <a href="input.html">Input to LaTeX</a><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 15 Jul 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-165.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-165.html deleted file mode 100644 index 0acce481a0d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-165.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Splitting the Input</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Splitting the Input</font></h1> - A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting the - whole input in a single large file, it's more efficient to split it - into several smaller ones. Regardless of how many separate files you - use, there is one that is the root file; it is the one whose name you - type when you run LaTeX. - -<H2>Subtopics</H2> -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-245.html">\include</A> -<li><A href="ltx-246.html">\includeonly</A> -<li><A href="ltx-248.html">\input</A> -</ul> -<hr> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-169.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-169.html deleted file mode 100644 index bfcf7224ec0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-169.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,26 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Starting and Ending</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Starting and Ending</font></h1> -<p> - Your input file must contain the following commands as a minimum. -<pre><tt> - <a href="ltx-22.html">\documentstyle{style}</a> - \begin{document} - ... your text goes here ... - \end{document} -</tt></pre> - where the <tt>style</tt> selected is one the valid styles for LaTeX; see - <a href="ltx-22.html">Document Styles</a>. -<p> - You may include other LaTeX commands between the <tt>\documentstyle</tt> and - the <tt>\begin{document}</tt> commands. -<hr> -See also <a href="input.html">Input to LaTeX</a><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-17.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-17.html deleted file mode 100644 index 54755ef470a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-17.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Commands</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> - -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">LaTex Commands</font></h1> - -<p>Commands take one of two forms:</p> - -<ul> - <li>a backslash (<tt>\</tt>) followed by a single special character - <li>a backslash (<tt>\</tt>) followed by a string of letters -</ul> - -<p>The second case is case-sensitive; -<a href="ltx-405.html"><tt>\Gamma</tt></a> is different from -<a href="ltx-405.html"><tt>\gamma</tt></a>. -These commands are terminated by a nonletter, i.e., a blank, a number, -a punctuation mark or special character. </p> - -<p>For commands which produce text a trailing blank is interpreted as the -end of the command, which does not automatically create a space, so -you may have to do something to create an -<a href="ltx-431.html">interword space</a> after this text.</p> - -<p>Commands may have mandatory arguments, which are input in braces -(<tt>{}</tt>). -They may also have optional arguments, which are input in square brackets -(<tt>[]</tt>).</p> - -<H2>Defining new commands, etc.</H2> - -<p>See: </p> - -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\newcommand</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-19.html"><tt>\newenvironment</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-20.html"><tt>\newtheorem</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-21.html"><tt>\newfont</tt></A> -</ul> -These must be used for entities which are not already defined. To -redefine something use, for example, -<A href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\renewcommand</tt></A>. -<hr> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 03 Nov 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-170.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-170.html deleted file mode 100644 index 4246f9dee24..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-170.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Table of Contents</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Table of Contents</font></h1> -<p> - A table of contents is produced with the - <a href="toc.html"><tt>\tableofcontents</tt></a> command. You - put the command right where you want the table of contents to go; - LaTeX does the rest for you. - Entries are taken from the <a href="ltx-141.html">Sectioning</a> commands. -<p> - <tt>\tableofcontents</tt> produces a heading, but it does not - automatically start a new page. If you want a new page after the - table of contents, include a - <a href="ltx-276.html"><tt>\newpage</tt></a> command after the - <tt>\tableofcontents</tt> command. -<p> - There are similar commands <tt>\listoffigures</tt> and - <tt>\listoftables</tt> for - producing a list of figures and a list of tables, respectively. - Everything works exactly the same as for the table of contents. -<p> - NOTE: Information for these tables and lists are placed in an auxiliary file - and you may have to run latex twice to get it to come out correctly. - If you want any of these items to be generated, you can not - have the <tt>\nofiles</tt> command in your document as that would suppress - writing of the auxiliary files. -See also -<ul> -<li><a href="toc.html"><tt>\tableofcontents</tt></a> -<li><A href="ltx-171.html"><tt>\addcontentsline</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-172.html"><tt>\addtocontents</tt></A> -</ul> -<hr> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-171.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-171.html deleted file mode 100644 index a6cfc68d9f4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-171.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \addcontentsline</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\addcontentsline</font></h1> - <tt>\addcontentsline{file}{sec_unit}{entry}</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\addcontentsline</tt> command adds an entry to the specified list or - table where -<ul> -<li><tt>file</tt> is the extension of the file on which information is to be - written: toc (table of contents), lof (list of figures), or lot - (list of tables). -<li><tt>sec_unit</tt> controls the formatting of the entry. It should be one - of the following, depending upon the value of the file argument: - <ul> - <li><TT>toc</TT> the name of the sectional unit, such as part or - subsection. - <li><TT>lof</TT> figure - <li><TT>lot</TT> table - </ul> -<li><tt>entry</tt> is the text of the entry. -</ul> -<p> -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-170.html">Table of Contents</a><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-172.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-172.html deleted file mode 100644 index 32423986d3d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-172.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \addtocontents</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\addtocontents</font></h1> - <tt>\addtocontents{file}{text}</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\addtocontents</tt> command adds text (or formatting commands) directly - to the file that generates the table of contents or list of figures or - tables. -<ul> -<li><tt>file</tt> is the extension of the file on which information is to be - written: toc (table of contents), lof (list of figures), or lot - (list of tables). -<li><tt>text</tt> is the information to be written. -</ul> -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-170.html">Table of Contents</a><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-173.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-173.html deleted file mode 100644 index 5e94279d73a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-173.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,18 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Terminal Input and Output</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Terminal Input and Output</font></h1> -Input from or output to the terminal is controlled by -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-174.html">\typeout</A> -<li><A href="ltx-175.html">\typein</A> -</ul> -<hr> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-174.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-174.html deleted file mode 100644 index 6cf8f287e3c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-174.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -<html><head><title>Help On LaTeX \typeout</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\typeout</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\typeout{msg}</tt> -<p> - Prints <tt>msg</tt> on the terminal and in the log file. Commands in - <tt>msg</tt> that are defined with <a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\newcommand</tt> - or <tt>\renewcommand</tt></a> are replaced by their - definitions before being printed. -<p> - LaTeX's usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space and - ignoring spaces after a command name apply to <tt>msg</tt>. - A <a href="ltx-431.html"<tt>\<space></tt></a> command - in <tt>msg</tt> causes a single space to be printed. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-173.html">Terminal Input and Output</A><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-175.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-175.html deleted file mode 100644 index b466a07ef25..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-175.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,22 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \typein</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\typein</font></h1> - <tt>\typein[cmd]{msg}</tt> -<p> - Prints <tt>msg</tt> on the terminal and causes LaTeX to stop and wait for you - to type a line of input, ending with return. If the <tt>cmd</tt> argument is - missing, the typed input is processed as if it had been included in - the input file in place of the <tt>\typein</tt> command. If the <tt>cmd</tt> - argument is present, it must be a command name. This command name is then - defined or redefined to be the typed input. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-173.html">Terminal Input and Output</A><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-176.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-176.html deleted file mode 100644 index 9606ffcc49f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-176.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,26 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Typefaces</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Typefaces</font></h1> -<p> - The typeface is specified by giving the size and style. A typeface is - also called a font. -<p> - In <a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e</a> the "styles" are replaced by a - <a href="fonts2e.html">Font Selection</a> scheme. - -<H2>Subtopics</H2> -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A> -<li><A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A> -<li><a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a> -<li><a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e Font Selection</a> -</ul> -<hr> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 19 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-177.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-177.html deleted file mode 100644 index 36d68f86c0b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-177.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,55 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Styles</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Styles</font></h1> - The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX. Note - that <a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e</a> differs on this point, - having instead a <a href="fonts2e.html">Font Selection</a> scheme, - but the following should still work (certainly in 2.09 mode). - <ul> - <li><a href="ltx-304.html"><tt>\rm</tt></a> Roman. - <li><a href="ltx-249.html"><tt>\it</tt></a> Italics. - <li><a href="ltx-221.html"><tt>\em</tt></a> Emphasis - (toggles between <tt>\it</tt> and <tt>\rm</tt>). - <li><a href="emph.html"><tt>\emph</tt></a> (LaTeX2e emphasis command) - <li><a href="ltx-204.html"><tt>\bf</tt></a> Boldface. - <li><a href="ltx-316.html"><tt>\sl</tt></a> Slanted. - <li><a href="ltx-313.html"><tt>\sf</tt></a> Sans serif. - <li><a href="ltx-308.html"><tt>\sc</tt></a> Small caps. - <li><a href="ltx-331.html"><tt>\tt</tt></a> Typewriter. -<p> - <li><a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt> and <tt>\unboldmath</tt></a> - (affects math mode fonts only) - </ul> -These are LaTeX -<a href="declarations.html"><em>delcarations</em></a> (with the exception of -<a href="emph.html"><tt>\emph</tt></a>), -i.e., they do not act on an argument, but change the way LaTeX prints the -following text. The <em>scope</em> of a declaration is ended by a right -brace (<tt>}</tt>) or an <tt>\end{}</tt> command whose matching -left brace (<tt>{</tt>) or <tt>\begin{}</tt> precedes the declaration. -<p> -Thus, for a short piece of italics or bold-face text one would use -<pre> - This is {\it italics} and this is {\bf in boldface}. -</pre> -which would be set as "This is <em>italics</em> and this is -<strong>in boldface</strong>. -<p> -In LaTeX2e the -<a href="emph.html"><tt>\emph</tt></a> command is considered more -suitable for short stretches of emphasized text. A typical use would be -<pre> - <tt>This is \emph{emphasized text}.</tt> -</pre> -<hr> -See also Typeface <a href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</a><br> -LaTeX2e <a href="fonts2e.html">Font Selection</a><br> -See also <a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 19 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-178.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-178.html deleted file mode 100644 index e29edcf5d4a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-178.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Sizes</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Sizes</font></h1> - The following type size commands, in order of increasing font size, - are supported by LaTeX. -<ul> - <li><a href="ltx-328.html"><tt>\tiny</tt></a> - <li><a href="ltx-309.html"><tt>\scriptsize</tt></a> - <li><a href="ltx-233.html"><tt>\footnotesize</tt></a> - <li><a href="ltx-317.html"><tt>\small</tt></a> - <li><a href="ltx-282.html"><tt>\normalsize</tt></a> (default) - <li><a href="ltx-253.html"><tt>\large</tt></a> - <li><a href="ltx-254.html"><tt>\Large</tt></a> (capital "l") - <li><a href="ltx-255.html"><tt>\LARGE</tt></a> (all caps) - <li><a href="ltx-242.html"><tt>\huge</tt></a> - <li><a href="ltx-243.html"><tt>\Huge</tt></a> (capital "h") -</ul> -The default for <tt>\normalsize</tt> is 10-point, but it may differ -for some <a href="ltx-22.html">Document Styles</a> or their options. -The actual size produced by these commands also depends on the Document -Style and, in some styles, more than one of these size commands may produce -the same actual size. -<p> -The new size takes effect immediately after the size command; -if an entire paragraph or unit is set in a certain size, the size command -should include the blank line or the <tt>\end{}</tt> which delimites -the unit. (See <a href="declarations.html">Declarations</a>.) -<p> -These commands cannot be used in <a href="ltx-130.html">math mode</a>. -However, part of a formula may be set in a different size by using -an <a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a> command containing the -size command. -<hr> -See also Typeface <a href="ltx-177.html">Styles</a>, - <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e Font Selection</a><br> -See also <a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 14 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-179.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-179.html deleted file mode 100644 index 8635de367ef..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-179.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX subscripts</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Subscripts</font></h1> -<p> - To get an expression, <tt>exp</tt>, to appear as a subscript, you just type - <tt>_{exp}</tt>.<p> - Can be used only in <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math</a> mode. - Thus, for a simple expression that is part of the running text: -<pre> - <tt>H$_2$O is the formula for water</tt> -</pre> -should display as "H<sub>2</sub>O is the formula for water". -Note that the braces around the argument may be omitted if the -subscript is a single character. -<p> -If a symbol has both subscripts and superscripts, the order doesn't matter. -The following are equivalent:<br> -<pre> <tt>a_n^2</tt> and <tt>a^2_n</tt></pre> -<p> -Subscripts are normally displayed in a smaller font; to prevent this and, -for example, use a standard Roman font, one would use; -<pre> - <tt>$J_{<a href="ltx-304.html">\rm</a> Roman}$</tt> -</pre> -<hr> - See also: <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>, - <A href="ltx-180.html">Superscripts</A><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-18.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-18.html deleted file mode 100644 index 715be743f32..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-18.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,88 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newcommand and \renewcommand</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newcommand \renewcommand</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\newcommand{cmd}[args][opt]{def}</tt> -<br> - <tt>\renewcommand{cmd}[args][opt]{def}</tt> -<br> - <tt>\providecommand{cmd}[args][opt]{def}</tt> -- - <a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e</a> -<p> - These commands define (or redefine) a command. -<ul> -<li><TT>cmd</TT> The name of the new or redefined command. - A <tt>\</tt> followed by a string of lower and/or uppercase - letters or a <tt>\</tt> followed by a single nonletter. - For <tt>\newcommand</tt> the name must - not be already defined and must not begin with <tt>\end</tt>; for - <tt>\renewcommand</tt> it must already be defined. The - <tt>\providecommand</tt> command is identical to the <tt>\newcommand</tt> - command if a command with this name does not exist; if it does - already exist, the <tt>\providecommand</tt> does nothing and the - old definition remains in effect. -<p> -<li><TT>args</TT> An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of - the command being defined. The default is for the command to - have no arguments. -<p> -<li><tt>opt</tt> (<strong><a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e only</a></strong>) - If present, then the first of the number of arguments specified by - <tt>args</tt> is optional with a default value of <tt>opt</tt>; - if absent, then all of the arguments are required. -<p> -<li><TT>def</TT> The text to be substituted for every occurrence of cmd; a - parameter of the form #n in cmd is replaced by the text of the - nth argument when this substitution takes place. -</ul> -<h2>Examples</h2> -<tt>\newcommand{\water}{H$_2$O}</tt> -<p> -This would allow one to write, e.g., -<pre> - The formula for water is \water. -</pre> -or -<pre> - \water\ is the formula for water. -</pre> -Note, in the second case, the trailing <tt>\</tt> followed by a blank -is required to ensure a blank space after the H<sub>2</sub>O; -LaTeX ignores the blank following a command, so the space has -to be specifically inserted with the -<a href="ltx-431.html"><tt>\<space></tt></a>. -<p> -As a second example consider -<p> -<tt>\newcommand{\hypotenuse}{$a^{2}+b^{2}$}</tt> -<p> -Note that this will produce the desired formula -in text (paragraph) mode because of the <tt>$...$</tt> in the definition. -In math mode, however, the first <tt>$</tt> -in the definition will cause LaTeX to leave math mode, causing problems. -<p> -In <strong>LaTeX 2.09</strong> a standard trick for getting around this is -to put the math-mode expression in an -<a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a>, viz., -<pre> - <tt>\newcommand{\hypotenuse}{\mbox{$a^{2}+b^{2}$}}</tt> -</pre> -<p> -In <strong>LaTeX2e</strong> the -<a href="ensuremath.html"><tt>\ensuremath</tt></a> command has been -provided to alleviate this problem. The argument of the <tt>\ensuremath</tt> -command is always processed in math mode, regardless of the current mode. -Using this mechanism the above could be written as -<pre> - <tt>\newcommand{\hypotenuse}{\ensuremath{a^{2}+y^{2}}}</tt> -</pre> -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-17.html">Commands</a><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a><br> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-180.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-180.html deleted file mode 100644 index f1dc0b481e7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-180.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Superscripts</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Superscripts</font></h1> -<p> - To get an expression, exp, to appear as a superscript, you just type - <tt>^{exp}</tt>.<p> - Can be used only in <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math</a> mode. -Thus, for a simple expression that is part of the running text: -<pre> - <tt>x$^3$ is the third power of x</tt> -</pre> -should display as "x<sup>3</sup> is the third power of x". Note that -the braces around the argument may be omitted if the superscript is -a single character. -<p> -If a symbol has both subscripts and superscripts, the order doesn't matter. -The following are equivalent:<br> -<pre> <tt>a_n^2</tt> and <tt>a^2_n</tt></pre> -<p> -Superscripts may have their own superscripts: -<pre> - <tt>$x^{y^{z}}$</tt> -</pre> -should display something like -<pre> - z - y - x -</pre> -<hr> - See also: <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>, - <A href="ltx-179.html">Subscripts</A><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-181.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-181.html deleted file mode 100644 index 4c58f7aba77..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-181.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,27 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \\</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\\</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\\[*][extra-space]</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\\</tt> command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an optional - argument, extra-space, that specifies how much extra vertical space is - to be inserted before the next line. This can be a negative amount. -<p> - The <tt>\\*</tt> command is the same as the ordinary <tt>\\</tt> command except that it - tells LaTeX not to start a new page after the line. -<p> - These commands are <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br> -See also <a href="ltx-202.html">Array</a>, - <a href="ltx-58.html">Tabbing</a>, and - <a href="ltx-68.html">Tabular</a> Environments<br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-182.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-182.html deleted file mode 100644 index e2f0ee12b6b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-182.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,26 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \-</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\-</font></h1> -<p> -<h2>In normal text</h2> - the <tt>\-</tt> command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that - point. LaTeX is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually find - all correct hyphenation points. The <tt>\-</tt> command is used for the - exceptional cases. -<p> -<h2>In the <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a> environment</h2> - the <tt>\-</tt> command moves the left margin of the next and all the following - commands one tab stop to the left. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, - <A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A>, - <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br> -See also <a href="ltx-244.html"><tt>\hyphenation</tt></a><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 15 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-183.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-183.html deleted file mode 100644 index daf7a958ded..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-183.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \;</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\;</font></h1> - Include a thick space in <a href="ltx-115.html">math mode</a>. - -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>, - <A href="ltx-118.html">Spacing in Math Mode</A><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-184.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-184.html deleted file mode 100644 index f363524f581..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-184.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \:</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\:</font></h1> - Include a medium space in <a href="ltx-115.html">math mode</a>. - -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>, - <A href="ltx-118.html">Spacing in Math Mode</A><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-185.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-185.html deleted file mode 100644 index fda562d9408..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-185.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \,</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\,</font></h1> -<p> - Include a thin space; can be used in all <a href="ltx-130.html">modes</a>, - not just math. -<hr> -See also: <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>, - <A href="ltx-118.html">Spacing in Math Mode</A><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995. -</address> -</body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-186.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-186.html deleted file mode 100644 index 8046229a6f1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-186.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \!</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\!</font></h1> - Include a negative thin space in <a href="ltx-115.html">math mode</a>. - -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>, - <A href="ltx-118.html">Spacing in Math Mode</A><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-187.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-187.html deleted file mode 100644 index 0a7ae1218df..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-187.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,20 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \=</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\=</font></h1> -<h2>In normal text</h2> -Produces a macron <a href="ltx-401.html">accent</a> (an over bar) -on the following character. - -<h2>In the <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a> environment</h2> - The <tt>\=</tt> command sets the tab stops. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, - <A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-188.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-188.html deleted file mode 100644 index a022349e222..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-188.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,16 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \></title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\></font></h1> - The <tt>\></tt> command causes LaTeX to advance to the next tab stop. - -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-189.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-189.html deleted file mode 100644 index 9150944470a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-189.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \<</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\<</font></h1> - The <tt>\<</tt> command allows you to put something to the left of the local - margin without changing the margin. - -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-19.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-19.html deleted file mode 100644 index a0474f32e71..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-19.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newenvironment</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newenvironment</font></h1> - - <tt>\newenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef}</tt> - <tt>\renewenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef}</tt> -<p> - These commands define or redefine an environment. -<p> -<ul> -<li><TT>nam</TT> The name of the environment. - For <tt>\newenvironment</tt> there - must be no currently defined environment by that name, nor may the - command <tt>\nam</tt> be currently defined. For - <tt>\renewenvironment</tt> the - environment "<tt>nam</tt>" must already be defined. <tt>nam</tt> - may contain letters, numbers, and asterisks; it may <strong>not</strong> - begin with "end...". -<p> -<li><TT>args</TT> An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of - the newly-defined environment. The default is no arguments. -<p> -<li><TT>begdef</TT> The text substituted for every occurrence of - <tt>\begin{nam}</tt>; a parameter of the form <tt>#n</tt> in - <tt>begdef</tt> is replaced by - the text of the nth argument when this substitution takes place. -<p> -<li><TT>enddef</TT> The text substituted for every occurrence of - <tt>\end{nam}</tt>. It may not contain any argument parameters. -</ul> -<h2>Changes in <a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e</a></h2> -It is possible to have an optional argument, the form of the command being -<pre> - <tt>\newenvironment{nam}[args][opt]{begdef}{enddef} - \renewenvironment{nam}[args][opt]{begdef}{enddef}</tt> -</pre> -If <tt>opt</tt> is present, the first of the <tt>args</tt> arguments -is optional with default value <tt>opt</tt>. If it is absent all -arguments are mandatory. -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-17.html">Defining commands</a>, -<a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 Nov 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-190.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-190.html deleted file mode 100644 index edd61c28adf..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-190.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \+</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\+</font></h1> - The <tt>\+</tt> command moves the left margin of the next and all the following - commands one tab stop to the right. - -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-191.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-191.html deleted file mode 100644 index 05f53f0e3d5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-191.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \'</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\'</font></h1> -<h2>In normal text</h2> -Produces an acute <a href="ltx-401.html">accent</a> on the following character. - -<h2>In the <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a> environment</h2> - The <tt>\'</tt> command moves everything that you have typed so far in the - current column , everything starting from the most recent - <a href="ltx-188.html"><tt>\></tt></a>, - <a href="ltx-189.html"><tt>\<</tt></a>, - <a href="ltx-192.html"><tt> \'</tt></a>, - <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a>, - or - <a href="ltx-251.html"><tt>\kill</tt></a> - command, to the right of the previous column, flush - against the current column's tab stop. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, -<A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A><br> - Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 1 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-192.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-192.html deleted file mode 100644 index 9ae2a1b7189..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-192.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \`</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\`</font></h1> -<p> -<h2>In normal text</h2> -Produces a grave <a href="ltx-401.html">accent</a> on the following character. - -<h2>In the <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a> environment</h2> - The <tt>\`</tt> command allows you to put text flushed right against any tab - stop, including tab stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right - of the last column because there's no tab stop there. The <tt>\`</tt> command - moves all the text that follows it, up to the - <a href="ltx-181.html"> <tt>\\</tt></a> or - <tt>\end{tabbing}</tt> - command that ends the line, to the right margin of the tabbing - environment. There must be no - <a href="ltx-188.html"><tt>\></tt></a> or - <a href="ltx-191.html"><tt>\'</tt></a> command between the <tt>\`</tt> and the - command that ends the line. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, - <A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-195.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-195.html deleted file mode 100644 index 64f5fabb3c8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-195.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,20 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \addtocounter</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\addtocounter</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\addtocounter{counter}{value}</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\addtocounter</tt> command increments the <tt>counter</tt> - by the amount - specified by the <tt>value</tt> argument, - which can be negative. -<hr> -See also: <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-198.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-198.html deleted file mode 100644 index 3b91b06f440..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-198.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,23 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \addvspace</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\addvspace</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\addvspace{length}</tt> -<p> - - The <tt>\addvspace</tt> command normally adds a vertical space of height - <tt>length</tt>. - However, if vertical space has already been added to the same - point in the output by a previous <tt>\addvspace</tt> command, then this - command will not add more space than needed to make the natural length - of the total vertical space equal to length. -<hr> -See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-199.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-199.html deleted file mode 100644 index cee315a9884..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-199.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,22 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \alph</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\alph</font></h1> - - <tt>\alph{counter}</tt> -<p> - This command causes the current value of <tt>counter</tt> to be printed in - alphabetic characters. The <tt>\alph</tt> command causes lower case alphabetic - characters, i.e., a, b, c..., while the <tt>\Alph</tt> command causes upper - case alphabetic characters, i.e., A, B, C... -<p> - The value of the counter must be less than 27. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 18 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-2.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-2.html deleted file mode 100644 index 9537a1851fa..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-2.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,328 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Commands</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> - -<h2><font color="#cc0000">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font></h2> - -<hr width="10%" align=left> - -<h1><font color="#cc0000">Help by <a href="#subj">Subject</a>, -<a href="#cmd">Command</a>, or <a href="#env">Environment</a></font></h1> - - -<h2><a name="subj">Subjects</a></h2> - -<ul> - <li><a href="ltx-401.html">Accenting characters</a> (umlauts, graves, etc.) - <li><a href="ltx-202.html">Arrays</a> (math mode) - <li><a href="ltx-17.html">Commands</a>, defining and redefining - <li><a href="ltx-434.html">Comments in input file</a> - <li><a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a> - <li><a href="ltx-13.html">Cross References</a> - <li><a href="ltx-430.html">Dashes</a> - <li><a href="declarations.html">Declarations</a> (changing how things look) - <li><a href="ltx-17.html">Defining New Commands</a> - <li><a href="ltx-22.html">Document Styles</a> - <li><a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a> - (or see <a href="#env">list below</a>) - <li><a href="ltx-82.html">Footnotes</a> - <li><a href="ltx-176.html">Fonts</a> - <li><a href="fragile.html">Fragile commands</a> (and how to protect them) - <li><a href="input.html">Input to LaTeX</a> - <li><a href="ltx-402.html">International characters and punctuation</a> - <li><a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a> and how to change them - <li><a href="ltx-91.html">Letters</a> (as in "Dear John") - <li><a href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</a> - <li><a href="lists.html">Lists</a> - <li><a href="ltx-111.html">Making Paragraphs</a> - <li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a> and - <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a> - <li><a href="ltx-130.html">Modes</a> (paragraph, left-right, math) - <li><a href="ltx-402.html">Non-English characters and punctuation</a> - <li><a href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</a> - <li><a href="ltx-43.html">Picture environment</a> - <li><a href="ltx-433.html">Quotation Marks</a> - <li><a href="ltx-141.html">Sectioning</a> - <li><a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a> - <li><a href="ltx-164.html">Special Characters</a>: # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { } - <li>Special Symbols - <ul> - <li><a href="ltx-401.html">Accents on characters</a> - (umlauts, graves, etc.) - <li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a> (math mode) - <li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational operators</a> (math mode) - <li><a href="ltx-403.html">Delimiters</a> - (parenthesis-like objects; math mode) - <li><a href="ellipses.html">Ellipses</a> - <li><a href="ltx-405.html">Greek letters</a> (math mode) - <li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a> - <li><a href="ltx-409.html">Math functions</a> - (sin, cos, log, ...; math mode) - <li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size math symbols</a> - (sums, integrals, ...; math mode) - </ul> - <li><a href="ltx-165.html">Splitting the Input</a> - <li><a href="ltx-169.html">Starting and Ending</a> - <li><a href="ltx-179.html">Subscripts</a> and - <a href="ltx-180.html">Superscripts</a> - <li><a href="ltx-67.html">Table</a>, - <a href="ltx-68.html">Tabular</a> and - <a href="ltx-58.html">Tabbing</a> Environments - <li><a href="ltx-170.html">Table of Contents</a> - <li><a href="ltx-173.html">Terminal Input and Output</a> - <li><a href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</a> -</ul> - -<h2><a name="cmd">LaTeX Commands</a></h2> - -<p>A LaTeX command begins with the command name, which consists of a <tt>\</tt> -followed by either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single non-letter. -Arguments contained in square brackets [] are optional while arguments -contained in braces {} are required.</p> - -<p>NOTE: LaTeX is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case -unless explicitly directed to do otherwise.</p> - -<ul> - <li><a href="ltx-431.html"><tt>\<space></tt></a> (force ordinary space) - <li><a href="ltx-432.html"><tt>\@</tt></a> (following period ends sentence) - <li><a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> (new line) - <li><a href="ltx-185.html"><tt>\,</tt></a> (thin space) - <li><a href="ltx-183.html"><tt>\;</tt></a> (thick space, math mode) - <li><a href="ltx-184.html"><tt>\:</tt></a> (medium space, math mode) - <li><a href="ltx-186.html"><tt>\!</tt></a> (negative thin space, math mode) - <li><a href="ltx-182.html"><tt>\-</tt></a> - (hyphenation; <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>) - <li><a href="ltx-187.html"><tt>\=</tt></a> - (set tab, see <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>) - <li><a href="ltx-188.html"><tt>\></tt></a> - (tab, see <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>) - <li><a href="ltx-189.html"><tt>\<</tt></a> - (back tab, see <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>) - <li><a href="ltx-190.html"><tt>\+</tt></a> - (see <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>) - <li><a href="ltx-191.html"><tt>\'</tt></a> - (<a href="ltx-401.html">accent</a> or <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>) - <li><a href="ltx-192.html"><tt>\`</tt></a> - (<a href="ltx-401.html">accent</a> or <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>) - <li><a href="ltx-403.html"><tt>\|</tt></a> (double vertical lines, math mode) - <li><tt>\(</tt> and <tt>\)</tt> - (define <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math environment</a>) - <li><tt>\[</tt> and <tt>\]</tt> - (define <a href="ltx-421.html">displaymath environment</a>) - <li><a href="ltx-171.html">\addcontentsline</a> - <li><a href="ltx-172.html">\addtocontents</a> - <li><a href="ltx-195.html">\addtocounter</a> - <li><a href="ltx-93.html">\address</a> - <li><a href="ltx-89.html">\addtolength</a> - <li><a href="ltx-198.html">\addvspace</a> - <li><a href="ltx-199.html">\alph</a> - <li><a href="ltx-200.html">\appendix</a> - <li><a href="ltx-201.html">\arabic</a> - <li><a href="ltx-203.html">\author</a> - <li><a href="ltx-164.html">\backslash</a> - <li><a href="baselineskip.html">\baselineskip</a> - <li><a href="baselineskip.html">\baselinestretch</a> - <li><a href="ltx-204.html">\bf</a> - <li><a href="ltx-205.html">\bibitem</a> - <li><a href="ltx-206.html">\bigskip</a> - <li><a href="boldmath.html">\boldmath</a> - <li><a href="ltx-407.html">\cal</a> - <li><a href="caption.html">\caption</a> - <li><a href="ltx-207.html">\cdots</a> - <li><a href="ltx-30.html">\centering</a> - <li><a href="ltx-210.html">\circle</a> - <li><a href="ltx-211.html">\cite</a> - <li><a href="ltx-212.html">\cleardoublepage</a> - <li><a href="ltx-213.html">\clearpage</a> - <li><a href="ltx-214.html">\cline</a> - <li><a href="ltx-98.html">\closing</a> - <li><a href="ltx-216.html">\dashbox</a> - <li><a href="ltx-217.html">\date</a> - <li><a href="ltx-218.html">\ddots</a> - <li><a href="ltx-220.html">\dotfill</a> - <li><a href="ltx-221.html">\em</a> - <li><a href="ensuremath.html">\ensuremath</a> (LaTeX2e) - <li><a href="ltx-226.html">\fbox</a> - <li><a href="ltx-227.html">\flushbottom</a> - <li><a href="ltx-230.html">\fnsymbol</a> - <li><a href="ltx-231.html">\footnote</a> - <li><a href="ltx-232.html">\footnotemark</a> - <li><a href="ltx-233.html">\footnotesize</a> - <li><a href="ltx-234.html">\footnotetext</a> - <li><a href="ltx-235.html">\frac</a> - <li><a href="ltx-236.html">\frame</a> - <li><a href="ltx-237.html">\framebox</a> - <li><a href="frenchsp.html">\frenchspacing</a> - <li><a href="ltx-238.html">\hfill</a> - <li><a href="ltx-239.html">\hline</a> - <li><a href="ltx-240.html">\hrulefill</a> - <li><a href="ltx-241.html">\hspace</a> - <li><a href="ltx-242.html">\huge</a> - <li><a href="ltx-243.html">\Huge (capital "h")</a> - <li><a href="ltx-244.html">\hyphenation</a> - <li><a href="ltx-245.html">\include</a> - <li><a href="ltx-246.html">\includeonly</a> - <li><a href="ltx-247.html">\indent</a> - <li><a href="ltx-248.html">\input</a> - <li><a href="ltx-249.html">\it</a> - <li><a href="item.html">\item</a> - <li><a href="ltx-251.html">\kill</a> - <li><a href="ltx-252.html">\label</a> - <li><a href="ltx-253.html">\large</a> - <li><a href="ltx-254.html">\Large (capital "l")</a> - <li><a href="ltx-255.html">\LARGE (all caps)</a> - <li><a href="ltx-256.html">\ldots</a> - <li><a href="ltx-403.html#big">\left</a> - <li><a href="lefteqn.html">\lefteqn</a> - <li><a href="ltx-257.html">\line</a> - <li><a href="ltx-258.html">\linebreak</a> - <li><a href="ltx-259.html">\linethickness</a> - <li><a href="textwidth.html">\linewidth</a> - <li><a href="ltx-261.html">\location</a> - <li><a href="ltx-262.html">\makebox</a> - <li><a href="ltx-263.html">\maketitle</a> - <li><a href="ltx-264.html">\markboth \markright</a> - <li><a href="ltx-407.html">\mathcal</a> - <li><a href="stackrel.html#mathop">\mathop</a> - <li><a href="ltx-265.html">\mbox</a> - <li><a href="ltx-266.html">\medskip</a> - <li><a href="ltx-268.html">\multicolumn</a> - <li><a href="ltx-269.html">\multiput</a> - <li><a href="ltx-18.html">\newcommand</a> - <li><a href="ltx-271.html">\newcounter</a> - <li><a href="ltx-19.html">\newenvironment</a> - <li><a href="ltx-21.html">\newfont</a> - <li><a href="ltx-87.html">\newlength</a> - <li><a href="ltx-275.html">\newline</a> - <li><a href="ltx-276.html">\newpage</a> - <li><a href="ltx-277.html">\newsavebox</a> - <li><a href="ltx-20.html">\newtheorem</a> - <li><a href="ltx-279.html">\nocite</a> - <li><a href="ltx-280.html">\noindent</a> - <li><a href="ltx-281.html">\nolinebreak</a> - <li><a href="ltx-282.html">\normalsize</a> (default) - <li><a href="ltx-283.html">\nopagebreak</a> - <li><a href="ltx-404.html#not">\not</a> - <li><a href="ltx-284.html">\onecolumn</a> - <li><a href="ltx-97.html">\opening</a> - <li><a href="ltx-286.html">\oval</a> - <li><a href="ltx-287.html">\overbrace</a> - <li><a href="ltx-288.html">\overline</a> - <li><a href="ltx-289.html">\pagebreak</a> - <li><a href="ltx-137.html">\pagenumbering</a> - <li><a href="ltx-291.html">\pageref</a> - <li><a href="ltx-138.html">\pagestyle</a> - <li><a href="ltx-293.html">\par</a> - <li><a href="ltx-294.html">\parbox</a> - <li><a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">\parindent</a> - <li><a href="parskip.html">\parskip</a> - <li><a href="fragile.html">\protect</a> - <li><a href="ltx-18.html">\providecommand</a> (LaTeX2e) - <li><a href="ltx-296.html">\put</a> - <li><a href="ltx-299.html">\raggedbottom</a> - <li><a href="ltx-300.html">\raggedleft</a> - <li><a href="ltx-301.html">\raggedright</a> - <li><a href="ltx-302.html">\raisebox</a> - <li><a href="ltx-303.html">\ref</a> - <li><a href="ltx-18.html">\renewcommand</a> - <li><a href="ltx-403.html#big">\right</a> - <li><a href="ltx-304.html">\rm</a> - <li><a href="ltx-305.html">\roman</a> - <li><a href="ltx-306.html">\rule</a> - <li><a href="ltx-307.html">\savebox</a> - <li><a href="ltx-307.html">\sbox</a> - <li><a href="ltx-308.html">\sc</a> - <li><a href="ltx-309.html">\scriptsize</a> - <li><a href="ltx-310.html">\setcounter</a> - <li><a href="ltx-88.html">\setlength</a> - <li><a href="ltx-90.html">\settowidth</a> - <li><a href="ltx-313.html">\sf</a> - <li><a href="ltx-314.html">\shortstack</a> - <li><a href="ltx-315.html">\signature</a> - <li><a href="ltx-316.html">\sl</a> - <li><a href="ltx-317.html">\small</a> - <li><a href="ltx-318.html">\smallskip</a> - <li><a href="ltx-319.html">\sqrt</a> - <li><a href="stackrel.html">\stackrel</a> - <li><a href="toc.html">\tableofcontents</a> - <li><a href="ltx-323.html">\telephone</a> - <li><a href="textwidth.html">\textwidth</a> - <li><a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">\textheight</a> - <li><a href="ltx-324.html">\thanks</a> - <li><a href="ltx-140.html">\thispagestyle</a> - <li><a href="ltx-328.html">\tiny</a> - <li><a href="ltx-329.html">\title</a> - <li><a href="ltx-330.html">\today</a> - <li><a href="ltx-331.html">\tt</a> - <li><a href="ltx-332.html">\twocolumn</a> - <li><a href="ltx-174.html">\typeout</a> - <li><a href="ltx-175.html">\typein</a> - <li><a href="ltx-335.html">\underbrace</a> - <li><a href="ltx-336.html">\underline</a> - <li><a href="unitlength.html">\unitlength</a> - <li><a href="ltx-337.html">\usebox</a> - <li><a href="ltx-338.html">\usecounter</a> - <li><a href="ltx-339.html">\value</a> - <li><a href="ltx-340.html">\vdots</a> - <li><a href="ltx-341.html">\vector</a> - <li><a href="ltx-342.html">\verb</a> - <li><a href="ltx-345.html">\vfill</a> - <li><a href="ltx-346.html">\vline</a> - <li><a href="ltx-403.html#big">\vphantom</a> - <li><a href="ltx-347.html">\vspace</a> -</ul> - - -<h2><a name="env">LaTeX Environments</a></h2> - -<p>LaTeX <a href="ltx-27.html">environments</a> are created by</p> - -<pre> \begin{<b>environment</b>} ... \end{<b>environment</b>}</pre> - -<p><a href="declarations.html">Declarations</a> can be effected by an -environment of the same name.</p> - -<ul> - <li><a href="ltx-420.html">abstract</a> - <li><a href="ltx-202.html">array</a> - <li><a href="ltx-29.html">center</a> - <li><a href="ltx-31.html">description</a> - <li><a href="ltx-421.html">displaymath</a> - <li><a href="ltx-222.html">enumerate</a> - <li><a href="ltx-223.html">eqnarray</a> - <li><a href="ltx-224.html">equation</a> - <li><a href="ltx-225.html">figure</a> - <li><a href="ltx-228.html">flushleft</a> - <li><a href="ltx-229.html">flushright</a> - <li><a href="ltx-250.html">itemize</a> - <li><a href="ltx-260.html">list</a> - <li><a href="ltx-115.html#math">math</a> - <li><a href="ltx-267.html">minipage</a> - <li><a href="ltx-43.html">picture</a> - <li><a href="ltx-297.html">quotation</a> - <li><a href="ltx-298.html">quote</a> - <li><a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a> - <li><a href="ltx-67.html">table</a> - <li><a href="ltx-68.html">tabular</a> - <li><a href="ltx-73.html">thebibliography</a> - <li><a href="ltx-77.html">theorem</a> - <li><a href="ltx-78.html">titlepage</a> - <li><a href="trivlist.html">trivlist</a> - <li><a href="ltx-79.html">verbatim</a> - <li><a href="ltx-81.html">verse</a> -</ul> - -<hr> - -<p>Return to the <a href="index.html">Introduction</a></p> - -<hr> - -<address> -Page revised: 1997:05:15, RBS -</address> - -</body> -</html> - diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-20.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-20.html deleted file mode 100644 index fcb6b6960d9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-20.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newtheorem</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newtheorem</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\newtheorem{env_name}{caption}[within]</tt> - <tt>\newtheorem{env_name}[numbered_like]{caption}</tt> -<p> - This command defines a theorem-like environment. -<ul> -<li><TT>env_name</TT> The name of the environment -- a string of letters. - Must not be the name of an existing environment or counter. -<p> -<li><TT>caption</TT> The text printed at the beginning of the environment, - right before the number. -<p> -<li><TT>within</TT> The name of an already defined counter, usually of a - sectional unit. Provides a means of resetting the new theorem - counter within the sectional unit. -<p> -<li><TT>numbered_like</TT> The name of an already defined theorem-like - environment. -</ul> - - The <tt>\newtheorem</tt> command may have at most one optional argument. - -<hr> -Go back to <a href="ltx-17.html">Definitions</a><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-200.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-200.html deleted file mode 100644 index d49f3203700..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-200.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \appendix</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\appendix</font></h1> - <tt>\appendix</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\appendix</tt> command changes the way sectional units are numbered. - The <tt>\appendix</tt> command generates no text and does not affect the - numbering of parts. -<p>Thus, if you want your appendix to be set off with a section-like -label you need something like<pre> - <tt>\begin{<a href="ltx-29.html">center</a>} - {<a href="ltx-204.html">\bf</a> APPENDIX} - \end{center}</tt> -</pre> -<hr> -I have found the <tt>\appendix</tt> command to sometimes cause -problems since <em>everything</em> which follows it is treated as part of -the appendix, for example, a list of figures, which I generally -want to place after an appendix is labeled "Appendix: List of Figures". -<p> -One can create a section labeled "APPENDIX" with distinctive numbering -by using the <a href="ltx-141.html"><tt>\section</tt></a> command -with suitably redefined commands for the <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a>. -The following example generates a single "Appendix" with equations numbered -A-1, A-2, ... <pre> - <tt><a href="ltx-18.html">\renewcommand</a>{\theequation}{A-\arabic{equation}} - % redefine the command that creates the equation no. - <a href="ltx-310.html">\setcounter</a>{equation}{0} % reset counter - <a href="ltx-141.html">\section*</a>{APPENDIX} % use *-form to suppress numbering</tt> -</pre> -If one had several appendices, appropriate numbering could be obtained by -redefining the <tt>\thesection</tt> command and resetting the section -counter in an analogous manner. -<hr> -See also: <A href="ltx-141.html">Sectioning</A>, - <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 14 Jul 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-201.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-201.html deleted file mode 100644 index d64e76faf58..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-201.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,18 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \arabic</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\arabic</font></h1> - - <tt>\arabic{counter}</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\arabic</tt> command causes the current value of <tt>counter</tt> - to be printed in arabic numbers, i.e., 3. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 18 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-202.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-202.html deleted file mode 100644 index 5727ba7bcfd..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-202.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,68 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX arrays</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Arrays</font></h1> -<p> -<p><pre> - \begin{array}[pos]{vvvv} - column 1 entry &: column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ - ... - ... - ... - \end{array} -</pre><p> - The array environment, like the <a href="ltx-68.html">tabular</a> - environment, produces a <a href="ltx-143.html">box</a> - consisting of a sequence of rows of - vertically aligned columns. It can be used only within the - <a href="ltx-115.html">math environment</a>. -<p> - There is a single mandatory argument describing the number of columns and - the alignment within each of them. - Each of the <tt>v</tt>'s in the argument specifies a column and may be - a <tt>l</tt>, <tt>c</tt>, or <tt>r</tt> indicating that the column should - be flush left, centered, or flush right, respectively. For more - complex options, see the <a href="ltx-68.html">tabular environment</a> - which uses the same format. -<p> - The optional <tt>pos</tt> argument specifies the alignment of the array with - its surrounding environment (recall that LaTeX treats boxes as one, - albeit large letter). The options are -<ul> -<li><tt>t</tt> - align on top row -<li><tt>b</tt> - align on bottom row -</ul> -The default is to align on the center of the array. -<p> - Column entries must be separated by an <tt>&</tt>. Column entries - may include other LaTeX commands, even other arrays. - Each row of the array must be terminated with - the string <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a>. - Note that there is no <tt>&</tt> after the last - item in a row and no <tt>\\</tt> after the last row. (An exception is if - an <tt><a href="ltx-239.html">\hline</a></tt> is used to place a line - at the bottom; it follows a <tt>\\</tt>.) -<p> -Each item in the array is treated as if it were surrounded by braces. Thus, -a <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> within an array item is -local to that item, i.e., it is ended by an <tt>&</tt> or <tt>\\</tt>. -<p> -Horizontal and vertical lines in the array are produced with -<ul> -<li><a href="ltx-214.html"><tt>\cline</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-239.html"><tt>\hline</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-346.html"><tt>\vline</tt></a> -</ul> -<hr> -See also -<ul> - <li><a href="ltx-68.html">tabular environment</a><br> - <li><a href="ltx-115.html">math environment</a> -</ul> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-203.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-203.html deleted file mode 100644 index 5c5e6604c0a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-203.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \author</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\author</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\author{names}</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\author</tt> command declares the author(s), where names is a list of - authors separated by <tt>\and</tt> commands. Use - <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> - to separate lines within a - single author's entry -- for example, to give the author's institution - or address. -<p> - NOTE: The milstd and book-form styles have re-defined the - <A href="ltx-263.html"><tt>\maketitle</tt></a> - command. The - <a href="ltx-329.html"><tt>\title</tt></a> - declaration is the only command that has any meaning. -<p> - A footnote for an author is produced with the - <a href="ltx-324.html"><tt>\thanks</tt></a> command. - -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</A><br> -See also <A href="ltx-263.html"><tt>\maketitle</tt></A>, - <a href="ltx-329.html"><tt>\title</tt></a><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 Nov 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-204.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-204.html deleted file mode 100644 index 44ed7387d11..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-204.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,20 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \bf</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\bf</font></h1> -<p> - Boldface typeface. -<p> -This is version 2.09; see also - <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a><br> -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, - <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br> -See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-205.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-205.html deleted file mode 100644 index d290d2c7cb7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-205.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \bibitem</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\bibitem</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\bibitem[label]{cite_key}</tt> -<p> - - The <tt>\bibitem</tt> command generates an entry labeled by <tt>label</tt>. - If the <tt>label</tt> - argument is missing, a number is generated as the label, using - the <tt>enumiv</tt> - <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a>. - The <tt>cite_key</tt> is a mnemonic consisting of any sequence of letters, - numbers, and punctuation symbols not containing a comma. -<p> - <tt>\bibitem</tt> and <a href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></a> are used - together much as <a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> and - <a href="ltx-303.html"><tt>\ref</tt></a> to produce a correspondence - between items in the Reference or Bibliography - (<a href="ltx-73.html"><tt>thebibliography</tt></a> environment). -<p> - This command writes - an entry on the aux file containing <tt>cite_key</tt> and the item's - <tt>label</tt>. - When this aux file is read by the - <a href="ltx-169.html"><tt>\begin{document}</tt></a> command, the item's - <tt>label</tt> is associated with <tt>cite_key</tt>, - causing the reference to <tt>cite_key</tt> by a - <a href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></a> command to produce the - associated <tt>label</tt>. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A><br> -See also <A href="ltx-73.html"><tt>thebibliography</tt></A>, - <a href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></a><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 17 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-206.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-206.html deleted file mode 100644 index 6649b51b387..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-206.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \bigskip</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\bigskip</font></h1> -<p> - The <tt>\bigskip</tt> command is equivalent to - <tt>\vspace{\bigskipamount}</tt> where - <tt>\bigskipamount</tt> is determined by the document style. -<hr> -See also: <A href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</A><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-207.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-207.html deleted file mode 100644 index 287ce7da3fc..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-207.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,26 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \cdots</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\cdots</font></h1> -<p> - The <tt>\cdots</tt> command produces a horizontal ellipsis where the dots are - raised to the center of the line.<br> - Can be used only in math mode. -<p> -See also: -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-218.html">\ddots</A> -<li><A href="ltx-256.html">\ldots</A> -<li><A href="ltx-340.html">\vdots</A> -<p> -<li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>, -<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>. -</ul> -<p> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 25 April 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-21.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-21.html deleted file mode 100644 index 9bfe0b716d4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-21.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,20 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newfont</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newfont</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\newfont{cmd}{font_name}</tt> -<p> - - Defines the command name <tt>cmd</tt>, which must not be currently defined, to - be a declaration that selects the font named <tt>font_name</tt> to be the - current font. -<hr> -Go back to <a href="ltx-17.html">Definitions</a><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-210.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-210.html deleted file mode 100644 index 554e7b8619d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-210.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,18 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \circle</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\circle</font></h1> - <tt>\circle[*]{diameter}</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\circle</tt> command produces a circle of the specified diameter. If - the *-form of the command is used, LaTeX draws a solid circle. -<hr> -See also: <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, - <A href="ltx-43.html">picture</A><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-211.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-211.html deleted file mode 100644 index a9fd440a2af..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-211.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \cite</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\cite</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\cite[text]{key_list}</tt> -<p> - - The <tt>key_list</tt> argument is a list of citation keys. This command - generates an in-text citation to the references associated with the - keys in <tt>key_list</tt> by entries on the aux file read by the - <a href="ltx-169.html"><tt>\begin{document}</tt></a> command. -<p> - <a href="ltx-205.html"><tt>\bibitem</tt></a> and <tt>\cite</tt> are used - together much as <a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> and - <a href="ltx-303.html"><tt>\ref</tt></a> to produce a correspondence - between items in the Reference or Bibliography - (<a href="ltx-73.html"><tt>thebibliography</tt></a> environment). -<p> -The <tt>\cite</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. -<hr> - See also <a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a>, - <A href="ltx-13.html">Cross References</A><br> - See also <a href="ltx-73.html"><tt>thebibliography</tt></a>, - <a href="ltx-205.html"><tt>\bibitem</tt></a><br> - Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 4 Jul 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-212.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-212.html deleted file mode 100644 index 8116dbf6023..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-212.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,18 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \cleardoublepage</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\cleardoublepage</font></h1> -<p> - The <tt>\cleardoublepage</tt> command ends the current page and causes all - figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be - printed. In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a - right-hand (odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-213.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-213.html deleted file mode 100644 index 8cee5c21f9d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-213.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,16 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \clearpage</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\clearpage</font></h1> -<p> - The <tt>\clearpage</tt> command ends the current page and causes all figures - and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-214.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-214.html deleted file mode 100644 index 41932ca6a02..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-214.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \cline</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\cline</font></h1> - <tt>\cline{i-j}</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\cline</tt> command draws horizontal lines across the columns - specified, beginning in column i and ending in column j, which are - identified in the mandatory argument. -<p> -It is used in the <A href="ltx-68.html">tabular</A> and -<a href="ltx-202.html">array</a> environment. -<p> - Two (or more) successive <tt>\cline</tt> commands draw lines in the same - vertical position. Typically, <tt>\cline</tt> commands are placed after a - <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> (line breadk) command so that - they separate items on two lines; they do - not, however, need a line break command afterwards. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-68.html">tabular</A> and - <a href="ltx-202.html">array</a> environments<br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 Oct 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-216.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-216.html deleted file mode 100644 index d0b9abfc97b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-216.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,22 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \dashbox</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\dashbox</font></h1> - <tt>\dashbox{dash length}(width,height)[pos]{ ... }</tt> -<p> - Used only in the <a href="ltx-43.html">picture environement</a>, - the <tt>\dashbox</tt> is like <a href="ltx-237.html"><tt>\framebox</tt></a> - but has an extra argument which specifies the width of each - dash. A dashed box looks best when the width and height are multiples - of the dash length. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</A><br> -See also <a href="ltx-237.html"><tt>\framebox</tt></a><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Dec 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-217.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-217.html deleted file mode 100644 index 0878ebe1c95..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-217.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,22 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \date</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\date</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\date{text}</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\date</tt> command declares <tt>text</tt> - to be the document's date. With no - <tt>\date</tt> command, the current date is used. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</A>, - <A href="ltx-263.html"><tt>\maketitle</tt></A><br> -See also <a href="ltx-330.html"><tt>\today</tt></a><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 17 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-218.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-218.html deleted file mode 100644 index 3b4394dae9a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-218.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \ddots</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\ddots</font></h1> -<p> - The <tt>\ddots</tt> command produces a diagonal ellipsis.<br> - Can be used only in math mode. -<p> -See also: -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-207.html">\cdots</A> -<li><A href="ltx-256.html">\ldots</A> -<li><A href="ltx-340.html">\vdots</A> -<p> -<li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>, -<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>. -</ul> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 25 April 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-22.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-22.html deleted file mode 100644 index cba6bef116a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-22.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Document Styles</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Document Styles</font></h1> -<p> - Valid LaTeX document styles include: - <ul> - <li><I>article</I> - <li><I>report</I> - <li><I>letter</I> - <li><I>book</I> - </ul> - They are selected with the following command: -<p> - <tt>\documentstyle[options]{style}</tt> -<p> - The options for the different styles are: -<ol> - <li>article: 11pt, 12pt, twoside, twocolumn, draft, fleqn, leqno, - acm - <li>report: 11pt, 12pt, twoside, twocolumn, draft, fleqn, leqno, acm - <li>letter: 11pt, 12pt, fleqn, leqno, acm - <li>book: 11pt, 12pt, twoside,twocolumn, draft, fleqn, leqno -</ol> - If you specify more than one option, they must be separated by a - comma. -<hr> -Related topics: -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-227.html">\flushbottom</A> -<li><A href="ltx-284.html">\onecolumn</A> -<li><A href="ltx-299.html">\raggedbottom</A> -<li><A href="ltx-332.html">\twocolumn</A> -</ul> -See also <a href="ltx-169.html">starting and ending</a><br> -The <tt>\documentstyle</tt> -command has been changed in <a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e</a><br> -<p> -Go to <A href="ltx-177.html">Typeface Styles</A><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jul 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-220.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-220.html deleted file mode 100644 index 7f3e2e56643..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-220.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \dotfill</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\dotfill</font></h1> -<p> - The <tt>\dotfill</tt> command produces a - <a href="ltx-86.html#rubber">rubber length</a> that produces dots - instead of just spaces. -<hr> -See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Oct 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-221.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-221.html deleted file mode 100644 index 47de00fca4c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-221.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,19 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \em</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\em</font></h1> -<p> - Emphasis (toggles between <tt>\it</tt> and <tt>\rm</tt>). -<p> -This is version 2.09; see also - <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a>, - <a href="emph.html"><tt>\emph</tt></a> -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, - <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br> -See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995. -</address></body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-222.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-222.html deleted file mode 100644 index 59eb551e8b6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-222.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,52 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX enumerate</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">enumerate</font></h1> -<p> -<p><pre> - \begin{enumerate} - \item First item - \item Second item - .... - \end{enumerate} -</pre> -<p> - The enumerate environment produces a numbered list. Enumerations can - be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also - be nested within other paragraph-making environments. -<p> -There must be at least one <tt>\item</tt> command within the environment. -<p> - Each item of an enumerated list begins with an - <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command. The optional <tt>label</tt> - argument of the <tt>\item</tt> command, if given, suppresses incrementing - the <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a>. If not given the default labels are - taken from the counters, <tt>enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv</tt> for the - four allowed levels of nesting, respectively. -<p> -<a name="example">The</a> numbering style for the enumeration is determined by -the commands, <tt>\labelenumi</tt>, <tt>\labelenumii</tt>, etc., for -the nested levels. These may be redefined with the -<a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\renewcommand</tt></a> command. -<p> -For example, to use upper case letters for the first level and lower -case letters for the second level of enumeration: -<pre> - <tt>\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{<a href="ltx-199.html">\Alph</a>{enumi}} - \renewcommand{\labelenumii}{<a href="ltx-199.html">\alph</a>{enumii}}</tt> -</pre> -<hr> - -See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, - <a href="lists.html">Lists</a>, - <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br> -See also <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Thanks to Robert Biddle, Robert.Biddle@Comp.VUW.AC.NZ, for info on -the <tt>\labelenumi</tt> commands.<br> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 Oct 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-223.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-223.html deleted file mode 100644 index 7d5200b374a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-223.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX eqnarray</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">eqnarray</font></h1> -<p> -<p><pre> - <tt>\begin{eqnarray[*]} - var_1 & rel_1 & eq1 \\ - var_2 & rel_2 & eq2 \\ - .... - \end{eqnarray[*]}</tt> -</pre> - - The eqnarray environment is typically used to display a sequence of equations - or inequalities; it may also be used to manage spacing for long equations. - The <a href="lefteqn.html"><tt>\lefteqn</tt></a> command is useful in - this environment for splitting long equations over several lines. -<p> - It is very much like a three-column - <a href="ltx-202.html">array environment</a>, with position argument <tt>rcl</tt>, - i.e., the columns are justified right, center, and left, respectively. - (However, <a href="ltx-268.html"><tt>\multicolumn</tt></a> may not be used.) -<p> - Consecutive rows are separated by <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> - commands and consecutive items within a - row separated by an <tt>&</tt>. Any item may be empty, i.e., no text. -<p> - A separate equation number is placed on every - line unless that line has a <tt>\nonumber</tt> command. - The optional <tt>eqnarray*</tt> form does not generate any equation numbers. -<p> - A <a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> command anywhere within a - row generates a reference to that row's number. -<hr> -Related topics -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A> -<li><a href="ltx-130.html">LaTeX Modes</a> -<li><a href="ltx-202.html">Array Environment</a> -<li><a href="ltx-224.html">Equation Environment</a> -<li><a href="ltx-421.html">Displaymath Environment</a> -<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a> -</ul> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 26 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-224.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-224.html deleted file mode 100644 index c007e0430da..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-224.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX equation</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">equation</font></h1> -<pre> - \begin{equation} - math formula - \label{eqno1} - \end{equation} -</pre> - - The equation environment centers your equation on the page and places - the equation number in the right margin. -<p> - The <a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> command is required - only if you want to use a <a href="ltx-303.html"><tt>\ref</tt></a> - command to refer to the number assigned to this equation. -<p> -The <a href="ltx-421.html">Display Math</a> environment gives the -same effect without the equation number. -<hr> -Related topics -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A> -<li><a href="ltx-130.html">LaTeX Modes</a> -<li><a href="ltx-223.html">Eqnarray Environment</a> -<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a> -</ul> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-225.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-225.html deleted file mode 100644 index e7b032ab3ba..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-225.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX figure</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">figure</font></h1> -<p> -<p><pre> - <tt>\begin{figure}[placement] - - body of the figure - - <a href="caption.html">\caption</a>{figure title} - \end{figure}</tt> -</pre> - - Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are - usually "floated" to a convenient place, like the top of a page. - Figures will not be split between two pages. -<p> - The optional argument [placement] determines where LaTeX will try to - place your figure. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly put - a float: -<ul> -<li><TT>h</TT> Here - at the position in the text where the figure - environment appears. -<li><TT>t</TT> Top - at the top of a text page. -<li><TT>b</TT> Bottom - at the bottom of a text page. -<li><TT>p</TT> Page of floats - on a separate float page, which is a page - containing no text, only floats. -</ul> - The standard report and article styles use the default placement tbp. -<p> - The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, - etc., you wish. The - <a href="caption.html"><tt>\caption</tt></a> - command allows you to title your figure. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, - <a href="ltx-43.html">Picture</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 12 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-226.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-226.html deleted file mode 100644 index 3becd1a50ff..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-226.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,26 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \fbox</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\fbox</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\fbox{text}</tt> -<p> - - The <tt>\fbox</tt> command is exactly the same as the - <a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a> command, except - that it puts a rectangular frame around the outside of the box - that it creates. -<p> - The <tt>\fbox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">robust</a>. -<hr> -See <tt><a href="ltx-237.html">\framebox</a></tt>, - <tt><a href="ltx-265.html">\mbox</a></tt><br> -See also <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 Aug 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-227.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-227.html deleted file mode 100644 index 9641d7baa84..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-227.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \flushbottom</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\flushbottom</font></h1> - The <tt>\flushbottom</tt> declaration makes all text pages the same height, - adding extra vertical space when necessary to fill out the page. - -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-22.html">Document Styles</a><br> -See also <a href="ltx-299.html"><tt>\raggedbottom</tt></a><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-228.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-228.html deleted file mode 100644 index 72224f71389..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-228.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX flushleft</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">flushleft</font></h1> -<p> -<p><pre> - \begin{flushleft} - Text on line 1 \\ - Text on line 2 \\ - .... - .... - \end{flushleft} -</pre> - The flushleft environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting - of lines that are flushed left to the left-hand margin. Each line - must be terminated with a - <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a>. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, - <a href="ltx-29.html">Center</a>, <a href="ltx-229.html">Flushright</a><br> -See also <a href="ltx-301.html"><tt>\raggedright</tt></a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> - diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-229.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-229.html deleted file mode 100644 index bd65c969c83..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-229.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,27 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX flushright</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">flushright</font></h1> - -<p><pre> - \begin{flushright} - Text on line 1 \\ - Text on line 2 \\ - ... - ... - \end{flushright} -</pre> - The flushright environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting - of lines that are flushed right to the right-hand margin. Each line - must be terminated with a <tt><a href="ltx-181.html">\\</a></tt>. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, - <a href="ltx-29.html">Center</a>, <a href="ltx-228.html">Flushleft</a><br> -See also <a href="ltx-300.html"><tt>\raggedleft</tt></a><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-230.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-230.html deleted file mode 100644 index 03784b5af2b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-230.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,26 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \fnsymbol</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\fnsymbol</font></h1> - - <tt>\fnsymbol{counter}</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\fnsymbol</tt> command causes the current value of <tt>counter</tt> - to be printed in - a specific sequence of nine symbols that can be used for numbering - footnotes. (The sequence is asterisk, dagger, double dagger, section - mark, paragraph mark, double vertical lines, double asterisks, double - daggers, double double daggers.) -<p> - The value of <tt>counter</tt> must be less between 1 and 9. -<p> - Can be used <strong>only</strong> in math mode. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 03 Nov 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-231.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-231.html deleted file mode 100644 index a27bb00fc67..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-231.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \footnote</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\footnote</font></h1> - <tt>\footnote[num]{text}</tt> - The <tt>\footnote</tt> command places a numbered footnote at the bottom - of the current page containing the contents of the argument, <tt>text</tt>. - The optional argument, <tt>num</tt>, is used to change - the default footnote number. This command can only be used in outer - paragraph mode. -<p> - If <tt>num</tt> is not specified, the footnote - <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a> is incremented and its value is used. -<p> - Note that <tt>num</tt> is specified as a positive integer even if - the footnote <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a> has been set to use letters - or roman numerals. -<p> -This command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile.</a> -<hr> -See also: <A href="ltx-82.html">Footnotes</A>, - <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br> -See also <a href="ltx-232.html"><tt>\footnotemark</tt></a> and - <a href="ltx-234.html"><tt>\footnotetext</tt></a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: RBS, 5 February 1997. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-232.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-232.html deleted file mode 100644 index 80680af1eb1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-232.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \footnotemark</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\footnotemark</font></h1> -<tt>\footnotemark[num]</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\footnotemark[num]</tt> command puts the footnote number in the text. - It is used in conjunction with <a href="ltx-234.html"><tt>\footnotetext</tt></a> - to produce footnotes where <a href="ltx-231.html"><tt>\footnote</tt></a> - cannot be used -<p> - If <tt>num</tt> is not given the footnote <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a> - is incremented and used. -<p> -This command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile.</a> -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-82.html">Footnotes</A>, -<a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br> -See also <tt><A href="ltx-231.html">\footnote</A></tt> - <tt><A href="ltx-234.html">\footnotetext</A></tt><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-233.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-233.html deleted file mode 100644 index b2b769e4ab6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-233.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,16 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \footnotesize</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\footnotesize</font></h1> - Third smallest of 10 typefaces available. This is the default size - for footnotes. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, - <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-234.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-234.html deleted file mode 100644 index 8a5557b3904..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-234.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \footnotetext</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\footnotetext</font></h1> - <tt>\footnotetext[num]{text}</tt> -<p> - - The <tt>\footnotetext</tt> command is used in conjunction with the - <a href="ltx-232.html"><tt>\footnotemark</tt></a> command and - places the <tt>text</tt> in the argument at the bottom - of the page. This command can come anywhere after the - <a href="ltx-232.html"><tt>\footnotemark</tt></a> - command. -<p> - The optional argument, number, is used to change the default footnote - number. - Otherwise, the footnote counter is not changed. -<p> -This command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile.</a> -<hr> -See also: <A href="ltx-82.html">Footnotes</A>, - <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br> -See also <tt><A href="ltx-231.html">\footnote</A></tt>, - <tt><A href="ltx-232.html">\footnotemark</A></tt><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-235.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-235.html deleted file mode 100644 index 660f12331fb..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-235.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \frac</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\frac</font></h1> - <tt>\frac{num}{den}</tt> -<p> - - The <tt>\frac</tt> command produces the fraction num divided by den, - placing the numerator over a horizontal line (solidus) and the - denominator below. - -<hr> -See also: <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>, - <A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 15 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-236.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-236.html deleted file mode 100644 index e383c0fa223..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-236.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \frame</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\frame</font></h1> -<pre>\frame{ ... } -</pre> - - The <tt>\frame</tt> command puts a rectangular frame around the object - specified in the argument. The reference point is the bottom left - corner of the frame. No extra space is put between the frame and the - object. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</A><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-237.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-237.html deleted file mode 100644 index 4ccb4121dab..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-237.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \framebox</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\framebox</font></h1> -<h2>Normal use</h2> - <tt>\framebox[width][position]{text}</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\framebox</tt> command is exactly the same as the - <a href="ltx-262.html"><tt>\makebox</tt></a> command, - except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that it - creates. -<p> - The framebox command produces a rule of thickness <tt>\fboxrule,</tt> and - leaves a space <tt>\fboxsep</tt> between the rule and the contents of the box. -<p> - The <tt>\framebox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. - -<h2>In picture environment</h2> -<tt>\framebox(width,height)[position]{...}</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\framebox</tt> command is exactly the same as the - <a href="ltx-262.html"><tt>\makebox</tt></a> command, - except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that it - creates. -<hr> - See also <tt><a href="ltx-226.html">\fbox</a></tt>, - <tt><a href="ltx-262.html">\makebox</a></tt>, - <tt><a href="ltx-216.html">\dashbox</a></tt><br> - See also <A href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</A>, - <A href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</A>.<br> - Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>. -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Dec 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-238.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-238.html deleted file mode 100644 index d2b610d8a4d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-238.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,18 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \hfill</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\hfill</font></h1> -<p> - The <tt>\hfill</tt> fill command produces a - <a href="ltx-86.html#rubber">rubber length</a> which can stretch or - shrink horizontally. It will be filled with spaces. It is equivalent - to <tt><a href="ltx-241.html">\hspace</a>\fill</tt>. -<hr> -See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Oct 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-239.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-239.html deleted file mode 100644 index 0aa58a30d9b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-239.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,27 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \hline</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\hline</font></h1> - The <tt>\hline</tt> command will draw a horizontal line the width of the table. - It's most commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom, and between - the rows of the table. -<p> - Two successive <tt>\hline</tt> commands leave a space between the - lines; this space does <strong>not</strong> contain the vertical lines - specified by <tt>|</tt> characters in the <tt>col</tt> argument of the - <a href="ltx-68.html"><tt>\begin{tabular}{col}</tt></a> command. -<p> - To place a line at the bottom of a table, the <tt>\hline</tt> command - must follow a <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> (line break) command - after the last table entry. This final line break command should be - present <strong>only</strong> in this circumstance. -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-202.html">array</a>, -<A href="ltx-68.html">tabular</A>.<br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 22 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-240.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-240.html deleted file mode 100644 index 9211fcf1f59..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-240.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,16 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \hrulefill</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\hrulefill</font></h1> -<p> - The <tt>\hrulefill</tt> fill command produces a - <a href="ltx-86.html#rubber">rubber length</a> which can stretch - or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a horizontal rule. -<hr> -See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Oct 1995. -</address> -</body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-241.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-241.html deleted file mode 100644 index bbf4f38e56c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-241.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,27 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \hspace</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\hspace</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\hspace[*]{len}</tt> -<p> - - The <tt>\hspace</tt> command adds horizontal space. The length of the space - <tt>len</tt> - can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands, i.e., points, - inches, etc. You can add negative as well as positive space with an - <tt>\hspace</tt> command. Adding negative space is like backspacing. -<p> - - LaTeX removes horizontal space that comes at the end of a line. If - you don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the optional * - argument. Then the space is never removed. -<hr> -See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a>, - <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995. -</address> -</body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-242.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-242.html deleted file mode 100644 index 8f78e1596da..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-242.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,15 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \huge</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\huge</font></h1> - Second largest of 10 typefaces available. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, - <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-243.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-243.html deleted file mode 100644 index 2b38b714c47..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-243.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,14 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \Huge (capital "h")</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\Huge (capital "h")</font></h1> - Largest of 10 typefaces available. All fonts may not be available in - this size. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, - <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995. -</address></body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-244.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-244.html deleted file mode 100644 index 37e02cc1172..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-244.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \hyphenation</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\hyphenation</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\hyphenation{words}</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\hyphenation</tt> command declares allowed hyphenation points, where - words is a list of words, separated by spaces, in which each - hyphenation point is indicated by a - character. For example -<pre> - <tt>\hyphenation{fortran,er-go-no-mic}</tt></pre> -indicates that "fortran" cannot be hyphenated and indicates allowed -hyphenation points for "ergonomic". -<p> -This argument to this command should contain words composed only of normal -letters. To suggest hyphenation points for strings containing nonletters -or <a href="ltx-401.html">accented letters</a>, use -the <a href="ltx-182.html"><tt>\-</tt></a> command in the input text. -<p> -This command is normally given in the <a href="input.html#structure">preamble</a>. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-245.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-245.html deleted file mode 100644 index ee636285985..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-245.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \include</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\include</font></h1> - <tt>\include{file}</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\include</tt> command is used in conjunction with the - <tt><a href="ltx-246.html">\includeonly</a></tt> - command for selective inclusion of files. The <tt>file</tt> argument is the - first name of a file, denoting <tt>file.tex</tt>. If the file is also - in the file list of the <tt>\includeonly</tt> command or if there is no - <tt>\includeonly</tt> command, the <tt>\include</tt> command is equivalent to -<Pre> - <tt><a href="ltx-213.html">\clearpage</a> \input{file} <a href="ltx-213.html">\clearpage</a></tt> -</Pre> - except that if the file <tt>file.tex</tt> does not exist, then a warning - message rather than an error is produced. If the file is not in the - file list, the <tt>\include</tt> command is equivalent to <tt>\clearpage</tt>. -<p> - The <tt>\include</tt> command may not appear in the preamble or in a file read - by another <tt>\include</tt> command. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-165.html">Splitting the Input</A><br> -See also <a href="ltx-248.html"><tt>\input</tt></a><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 30 Oct 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-246.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-246.html deleted file mode 100644 index 08951cd0f9b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-246.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,18 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \includeonly</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\includeonly</font></h1> - <tt>\includeonly{file_list}</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\includeonly</tt> command controls which files will be read in by an - <a href="ltx-245.html"><tt>\include</tt></a> command. - It can only appear in the preamble. -<hr> -See also: <A href="ltx-165.html">Splitting the Input</A><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-247.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-247.html deleted file mode 100644 index dc52f57e073..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-247.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,19 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \indent</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\indent</font></h1> - This produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width of the - paragraph indentation - (<a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd"><tt>\parindent</tt></a>). - It is used to add paragraph indentation where - it would otherwise be suppressed. -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-280.html"><tt>\noindent</tt></a><br> -See also <A href="ltx-111.html">Making Paragraphs</A><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-248.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-248.html deleted file mode 100644 index 0de0c73f47a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-248.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \input</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\input</font></h1> - <tt>\input{file}</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\input</tt> command causes the indicated <tt>file</tt> - to be read and processed, - exactly as if its contents had been inserted in the current file at - that point. The file name may be a complete file name with extension - or just a first name, in which case the file <tt>file.tex</tt> is used. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-165.html">Splitting the Input</A><br> -See also <A href="ltx-245.html"><tt>\include</tt></A><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 30 Oct 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-249.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-249.html deleted file mode 100644 index 18c1d92a31e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-249.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,18 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \it</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\it</font></h1> -<p> - Italics typeface. -<p> -This is version 2.09; see also - <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a><br> -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, - <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br> -See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995. -</address></body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-250.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-250.html deleted file mode 100644 index c8e7d40c39b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-250.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX itemize</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">itemize</font></h1> -<pre> - <tt>\begin{itemize} - \item First item - \item Second item - .... - \end{itemize}</tt> -</pre> - - The itemize environment produces a list with "tick-marks" (typically - "bullets" for first level). Itemizations can be - nested within one another, up to four levels deep. -<p> - Each item of an itemized list begins with an - <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command. There - must be at least one <tt>\item</tt> command within the environment. -<p> -The default optional -<tt>label</tt> argument of the <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command -is given by the <tt>\labelitemi, \labelitemii, \labelitemiii, \labelitemiv</tt> -commands, respectively, depending on the nesting level. -These may be redefined with the <a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\renewcommand</tt></a> -command. For example, to make the first level marks nice five-point stars, -<pre> - <tt>\renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$<a href="ltx-404.html">\star</a>$}</tt> -</pre> -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, - <a href="lists.html">Lists</a>, - <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br> -See also <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 18 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-251.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-251.html deleted file mode 100644 index 8ad9d646231..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-251.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,22 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \kill</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\kill</font></h1> - The <tt>\kill</tt> command allows you to set tab stops without producing text. - It works just like the - <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> except - that it throws away the current line - instead of producing output for it. The effect of any - <a href="ltx-187.html"><tt>\=</tt></a>, - <a href="ltx-190.html"><tt>\+</tt></a> or - <a href="ltx-182.html"><tt>\-</tt></a> - commands in that line remain in effect. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-58.html">Tabbing</A> Environment<br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-252.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-252.html deleted file mode 100644 index 3e70e99f308..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-252.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \label</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\label</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\label{key}</tt> -<p> - - A <tt>\label</tt> command appearing in ordinary text assigns to the - <tt>key</tt> the - number of the current sectional unit; one appearing inside a numbered - environment assigns that number to the <tt>key</tt>. -<p> - A <tt>key</tt> can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or punctuation - characters. Upper- and lowercase letters are different. -<p> - The number assigned to the key can be accessed by use of the - <a href="ltx-303.html"><tt>\ref</tt></a> command. For example, -<pre> - \begin{equation} .... - .... - \label{eq:no1} - \end{equation} - ... - One can see from Eq.~(\ref{eq:no1}) that ... -</pre> -<p> -In a <a href="ltx-67.html">table</a> or <a href="ltx-225.html">figure</a> -environment, the <tt>\label</tt> command should follow the -<a href="caption.html"><tt>\caption</tt></a> command (or be part of its -argument) since it is the <tt>\caption</tt> command which generates the -number. -<p> -The <tt>\label</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a> but it -can be used in the argument of a -<a href="ltx-141.html">sectioning command</a> or -<a href="caption.html"><tt>\caption</tt></a> command. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-13.html">Cross References</A><br> -See also <a href="ltx-303.html"><tt>\ref</tt></a>, - <a href="ltx-291.html"><tt>\pageref</tt></a> <br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-253.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-253.html deleted file mode 100644 index 9413e7a7f59..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-253.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,15 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \large</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\large</font></h1> - Slightly larger than default typeface size. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, - <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-254.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-254.html deleted file mode 100644 index 6a981aa4a57..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-254.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,16 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \Large (capital "l")</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\Large (capital "l")</font></h1> - Fourth largest of typefaces available. Is generally the default for - titles. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, - <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-255.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-255.html deleted file mode 100644 index d1d96f9c62a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-255.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,14 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \LARGE (all caps)</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\LARGE (all caps)</font></h1> - Third largest of typefaces available. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, - <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-256.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-256.html deleted file mode 100644 index 5ba330fb9fc..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-256.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \ldots</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\ldots</font></h1> - The <tt>\ldots</tt> command produces an ellipsis.<br> - Unlike <tt>\cdots, \ddots, \vdots,</tt> - this command works in any mode, not just math mode. -<p> -See also: -<ul> - <li><A href="ltx-207.html">\cdots</A> - <li><A href="ltx-218.html">\ddots</A> - <li><A href="ltx-340.html">\vdots</A> -<p> - <li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>, - <li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>. -</ul> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 25 April 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-257.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-257.html deleted file mode 100644 index 616a63de4f0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-257.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \line</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\line</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\line(x-slope,y-slope){length}</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\line</tt> command draws a line of the specified length and slope. -<p> -The slope is determined by <tt>(x-slope,y-slope)</tt> which are signed -integers of magnitude less than or equal to 6 and which have no common -divisor except for plus or minus one; For example (1,0) is a horizontal -line; (1,1) gives a slope of -45 degress; (0,1) is a vertical line; (-1,1) is 135 degrees. -<p> -The <strong>horizontal</strong> extent of the line is given by the -<tt>length</tt> parameter, except in the case of a vertical line in -which case <tt>length</tt> specifies the vertical height. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, - <A href="ltx-43.html">picture</A><br> -See also <a href="ltx-341.html"><tt>\vector</tt></a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 12 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-258.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-258.html deleted file mode 100644 index ef7125b06bf..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-258.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \linebreak</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\linebreak</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\linebreak[number]</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\linebreak</tt> command tells LaTeX to break the current line at the - point of the command. With the optional argument, number, you can - convert the <tt>\linebreak</tt> command from a demand to a request. The number - must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more - insistent the request is. -<p> - The <tt>\linebreak</tt> command causes LaTeX to stretch the line so it extends - to the right margin. -<p> -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-259.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-259.html deleted file mode 100644 index 9bce5892257..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-259.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,20 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \linethickness</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\linethickness</font></h1> - <tt>\linethickness{dimension}</tt> -<p> - Declares the thickness of horizontal and vertical lines in a picture - environment to be dimension, which must be a positive length. It does - not affect the thickness of slanted lines and circles, or the quarter - circles drawn by <tt>\oval</tt> to form the corners of an oval. -<hr> -See also: <A href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</A>, - <A href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</A><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-260.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-260.html deleted file mode 100644 index f89f998f05c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-260.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,95 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX list enviroment</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">list</font></h1> -<p> -<p><pre> - <tt>\begin{list}{label}{spacing} - \item First item - \item Second item - .... - \end{list}</tt> -</pre> - The <tt>label</tt> argument specifies the <em>default</em> label for items - in the list; it may be overriden with the optional argument of the - <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command. It is - a piece of text that is inserted in a box to form the - label. This argument can and usually does contain other LaTeX - commands. -<p> - The <tt>spacing</tt> argument contains commands to change the spacing - parameters for the list. This argument will most often be null, i.e. - <tt>{}</tt>. This will select default spacings, which depends on the - <a href="ltx-22.html">document style</a> and options, and - which should suffice for - most cases. However, the commands which can be put here are -<ul> -<li><tt>\topsep</tt> amount of extra vertical space at top of list -<li><tt>\partopsep</tt> extra length at top if environment is prececed - by a blank line (it should be a <a href="ltx-86.html#rubber">rubber length</a>) -<li><tt>\itemsep</tt> amount of extra vertical space between items -<li><tt>\parsep</tt> amount of vertical space between paragraphs <em>within</em> - an item -<li><tt>\leftmargin</tt> horizontal distance between the left margins of - the environment and the list; must be nonnegative -<li><tt>\rightmargin</tt> horizontal distance betwen the right margins of - the enviroment and the list; must be nonnegative -<li><tt>\listparindent</tt> amount of extra space for paragraph indent <em>after - the first</em> in an item; can be negative -<li><tt>\itemindent</tt> indentation of first line of an item; can be negative -<li><tt>\labelsep</tt> separation between end of the box containing the label - and the text of the first line of an item -<li><tt>\labelwidth</tt> normal width of the box containing the label; if the - actual label is bigger, the natural width is used, extending into the - space for the first line of the item's text -<li><tt>\makelabel{label}</tt> generates the label printed by the - <tt>\item</tt> command -<p> -<li><a href="ltx-338.html"><tt>\usecounter{ctr}</tt></a> - enables the counter <tt>ctr</tt> to be used - for numbering items; it is initialized to zero and stepped when - executing an <tt>\item</tt> command that has no optional <tt>label</tt> - argument. -</ul> - -<h2><a name="example">An Example</a></h2> -An simple example of things that can be done with the List Enviroment -will illustrate typical usage of the arguments. The following will -make a list numbered by "Item-#", where the # is an upper case -Roman numeral, and will indent the right margin the same -as the left margin (it is not normally indented in most styles). -<pre> - <tt>% define "Lcount" as a counter - <a href="ltx-271.html">\newcounter</a>{Lcount} - % set the "default" label to print counter as a Roman numeral - \begin{list}{Item-<a href="ltx-305.html">\Roman</a>{Lcount}} - % inform the list command to use this counter - {<a href="ltx-338.html">\usecounter</a>{Lcount} - % set rightmargin equal to leftmargin - <a href="ltx-88.html">\setlength</a>{\rightmargin}{\leftmargin}} - % we can now begin the "items" - <a href="item.html">\item</a> This is the first item - \item And this is the second item - \end{list}</tt> -</pre> -Note that this would produce something like: -<pre> - Item-I This is the first item - Item-II And this is the second item -</pre> -<hr> -See <a href="lists.html">Lists</a>, - <a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a>, - <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a>, - <a href="ltx-86.html">Lenghts</a><br> -See also <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Oct 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> - - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-261.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-261.html deleted file mode 100644 index 5800bce00e1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-261.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \location</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\location</font></h1> - <tt>\location{address}</tt> -<p> - This modifies your organization's standard address. This only appears - if the firstpage pagestyle is selected. -<hr> -See also: <A href="ltx-91.html">Letters</A><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-262.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-262.html deleted file mode 100644 index 074fa60fdc8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-262.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,62 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \makebox</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\makebox</font></h1> -<h2>Normal use</h2> - <tt>\makebox[width][position]{text}</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\makebox</tt> command creates a box to contain the specified - <tt>text</tt>. The - width of the box may be specified by the optional <tt>width</tt> argument. - The <tt>text</tt> in the box is set in LR mode. -<p> - If the optional <tt>width</tt> argument is used, the optional - <tt>position</tt> argument may also be used to specify the position of - <tt>text</tt> within the box as follows: -<ul> -<li><tt>l</tt> - flushleft -<li><tt>r</tt> - flushright -<li><tt>s</tt> - interword space adjusted so <tt>text</tt> fills box exactly -</ul> -The default horizontal and vertical positioning (if the second optional -argument is omitted) is to center <tt>text</tt> -in the box. -<p> -Note that <tt>text</tt> may overflow the box, in which case it is -typeset on top of the adjacent text. While this is generally undesirable, -it can also be used to create special effects. -<p> -The <tt>\makebox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. -<p> -See <tt><a href="ltx-265.html">\mbox</a></tt>, - <tt><a href="ltx-237.html">\framebox</a></tt><br> -See also: <A href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</A>. - -<h2>In picture environment</h2> - <tt>\makebox(width,height)[position]{ ... }</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\makebox</tt> command for the picture environment is similar to the - normal <tt>\makebox</tt> command except that you must specify a width and - height (note that these are in parentheses) in multiples of - <a href="unitlength.html"><tt>\unitlength</tt></a>. -<p> - The optional argument, <tt>position</tt>, specifies the quadrant that your - text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: -<ul> -<li><TT>t</TT> Moves the item to the top of the rectangle -<li><TT>b</TT> Moves the item to the bottom -<li><TT>l</TT> Moves the item to the left -<li><TT>r</TT> Moves the item to the right -</ul> -The default horizontal and vertical positioning is to center <tt>text</tt> -in the box. -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a>, - <A href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</A><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Dec 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-263.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-263.html deleted file mode 100644 index b1760e41993..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-263.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ -<html><head><title>Help On LaTeX \maketitle</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\maketitle</font></h1> - <tt>\maketitle</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\maketitle</tt> command generates a title on a separate title page - - except in the article style, where the title normally goes at the top - of the first page. Information used to produce the title is obtained - from the following declarations, which should precede the - <tt>\maketitle</tt> command. -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-203.html"><tt>\author</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-217.html"><tt>\date</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-324.html"><tt>\thanks</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-329.html"><tt>\title</tt></A> -</ul> -<p> -The <a href="ltx-78.html">Titlepage Environment</a> -allows you to design your own title page, rather than using that -created by the <tt>\maketitle</tt> command whose format is determined -by the <a href="ltx-22.html">document style</a>. -. -<hr> -See also: <A href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</A>, - <a href="ltx-78.html">Titlepage Environment</a><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 Nov 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-264.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-264.html deleted file mode 100644 index 8395d8863f1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-264.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ -<html><head> -<title>Help On LaTeX \markboth \markright</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\markboth \markright</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\markboth{left head}{right head}</tt> -<p> - <tt> \markright{right head}</tt> -<p> - - The <tt>\markboth</tt> and <tt>\markright</tt> - commands are used in conjunction with the - page style myheadings for setting either both or just the right - heading. In addition to their use with the myheadings page style, you - can use them to override the normal headings in the headings style, - since LaTeX uses these same commands to generate those heads. You - should note that a left-hand heading is generated by the last - <tt>\markboth</tt> command before the end of the page, while a right-hand - heading is generated by the first <tt>\markboth</tt> or <tt>\markright</tt> - that comes - on the page if there is one, otherwise by the last one before the - page. -<hr> -See also: <A href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</A>, -<A href="ltx-138.html"><tt>\pagestyle</tt></A>.<br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 17 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-265.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-265.html deleted file mode 100644 index d4d1b8a3a8d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-265.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \mbox</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\mbox</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\mbox{text}</tt> -<p> - - The <tt>\mbox</tt> command creates a box just wide enough to hold the - <tt>text</tt> in its argument. The <tt>text</tt> in the box is in LR - <a href="ltx-130.html">mode</a> which prevents it from being broken across - lines. -<p> - The <a href="ltx-262.html"><tt>\makebox</tt></a> command is similar - except that it allows you to specify a width which is not necessarily - the natural width of the <tt>text</tt> and also to specify the placement - within the box. -<p> -An <tt>\mbox</tt> within <a href="ltx-130.html">math mode</a> does -<strong>not</strong> use the current <a href="mathfonts.html">math font</a>; -rather it uses the <a href="ltx-176.html">typeface</a> of the surrounding -running text. -<p> -The <tt>\mbox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">robust</a>. -<hr> -See <a href="ltx-226.html"><tt>\fbox</tt></a>, - <a href="ltx-262.html"><tt>\makebox</tt></a><br> -See also <A href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</A><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 Aug 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-266.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-266.html deleted file mode 100644 index d6c56fb7ec8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-266.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \medskip</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\medskip</font></h1> -<p> - The <tt>\medskip</tt> command is equivalent to - <tt><a href="ltx-347.html">\vspace</a>{\medskipamount}</tt> where - <tt>\medskipamount</tt> is determined by the document style. -<hr> -See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995. -</address> -</body></html> - diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-267.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-267.html deleted file mode 100644 index 123f724b200..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-267.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,52 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX minipage</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">minipage</font></h1> -<pre> - \begin{minipage}[position]{width} - text - \end{minipage} -</pre> - The minipage environment is similar to a - <a href="ltx-294.html"><tt>\parbox</tt></a> command. It takes - the same optional position argument and mandatory width argument. You - may use other paragraph-making environments such as the - <a href="lists.html">list-making</a> and - <a href="ltx-68.html">tabular</a> environments inside a minipage. You can - also use the minipage environment or - <a href="ltx-294.html"><tt>\parbox</tt></a> command to put one or - more paragraphs - inside of a <a href="ltx-43.html">picture environment</a> or as a - <a href="ltx-67.html">table item</a>, for example. -<p> - There is no paragraph indentation in the minipage environment. That is, - LaTeX sets <a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd"><tt>\parindent</tt></a> to zero; - however, you may override this with a - <a href="ltx-88.html"><tt>\setlength</tt></a> command. -<p> - Footnotes in a minipage environment are handled in a way that is - particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A - <a href="ltx-231.html"><tt>\footnote</tt></a> command puts the - footnote at the bottom of - the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it uses the - <tt>mpfootnote</tt> <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a> instead of the ordinary - footnote counter. If you want the footnote in a minipage environment - to be placed at the bottom of the actual page, in the usual fashion, - use the <a href="ltx-232.html"><tt>\footnotemark</tt></a> and - <a href="ltx-234.html"><tt>\footnotetext</tt></a> commands. -<p> - <strong>Note</strong>: if you put one minipage inside another - and if you are using - footnotes, they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage. - -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, - <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> -See also <a href="ltx-294.html"><tt>\parbox</tt></a><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 22Nov 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-268.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-268.html deleted file mode 100644 index 1076a69b3aa..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-268.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \multicolumn</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\multicolumn</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\multicolumn{cols}{pos}{text}</tt> -<p> - Used only in <a href="ltx-202.html">array</a> or - <a href="ltx-68.html">tabular</a> environments. -<p> - The <tt>\multicolumn</tt> is command is - used to make an entry that spans several columns. -<p> - It is useful for making table headings which span several columns, or - for changing the positioning of the heading for a single column (the - <tt>pos</tt> argument in <tt>\multicolumn</tt> overriding that of - the <tt>\tabular</tt> value, for example). -<p> - The first mandatory argument, <tt>cols</tt>, specifies the number of columns to - span. The second mandatory argument, <tt>pos</tt>, specifies the formatting of - the entry; -<ul> -<li>c for centered -<li>l for flushleft -<li>r for flushright -</ul> - The third mandatory argument, <tt>text</tt>, - specifies what text is to make up the entry. -<p> - <tt>\multicolumn</tt> must either begin a row or be placed immediately - after an <tt>&</tt>. - -<hr>See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, - <a href="ltx-202.html">array</a>, - <A href="ltx-68.html">tabular</A><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-269.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-269.html deleted file mode 100644 index cb6e02dcb4c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-269.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,19 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \multiput</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\multiput</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\multiput(x coord,y coord)(delta x,delta y){number of copies}{object}</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\multiput</tt> command can be used when you are putting the same object - in a regular pattern across a picture. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, - <A href="ltx-43.html">picture</A><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 12 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-27.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-27.html deleted file mode 100644 index 9746d13ae2a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-27.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,65 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Environments</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Environments</font></h1> -<p> - LaTeX provides a number of different paragraph-making environments. - Each environment begins and ends in the same manner. -<p> -<pre> - \begin{environment-name} - .... - .... - \end{environment-name} -</pre> -Blank lines before the <tt>\begin{}</tt> or after the <tt>\end{}</tt> cause a -paragraph break before or after the environment. -Blank lines after the <tt>\begin{}</tt> or before the <tt>\end{}</tt> are -ignored. -<p> -All <a href="declarations.html">declarations</a> have an environment of the -same name. However, the reverse does not always work. For example, -<tt>{\abstract Abstract text ... .}</tt> may not give correct paragraph -breaks. - -<H2>Subtopics</H2> -<ul> -<li><a href="ltx-420.html">abstract</a> -<li><A href="ltx-202.html">array</A> -<li><A href="ltx-29.html">center</A> -<li><A href="ltx-31.html">description</A> -<li><a href="ltx-421.html">displaymath</a> -<li><A href="ltx-222.html">enumerate</A> -<li><A href="ltx-223.html">eqnarray</A> -<li><A href="ltx-224.html">equation</A> -<li><A href="ltx-225.html">figure</A> -<li><A href="ltx-228.html">flushleft</A> -<li><A href="ltx-229.html">flushright</A> -<li><A href="ltx-250.html">itemize</A> -<li><A href="ltx-260.html">list</A> -<li><a href="ltx-115.html#math">math</a> -<li><A href="ltx-267.html">minipage</A> -<li><A href="ltx-43.html">picture</A> -<li><A href="ltx-297.html">quotation</A> -<li><A href="ltx-298.html">quote</A> -<li><A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A> -<li><A href="ltx-67.html">table</A> -<li><A href="ltx-68.html">tabular</A> -<li><A href="ltx-73.html">thebibliography</A> -<li><A href="ltx-77.html">theorem</A> -<li><A href="ltx-78.html">titlepage</A> -<li><a href="trivlist.html">trivlist</a> -<li><A href="ltx-79.html">verbatim</A> -<li><A href="ltx-81.html">verse</A> -</ul> -<hr> -See also <a href="declarations.html">Declarations</a>, - <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 Nov 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> - diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-271.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-271.html deleted file mode 100644 index 856bad72da7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-271.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,22 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newcounter</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newcounter</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\newcounter{newname}[oldcounter]</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\newcounter</tt> command defines a new counter named -<tt>newname</tt>. The optional - argument <tt>oldcounter</tt> must be the name of an already defined - counter; if present the new counter, <tt>newname</tt>, will be - reset whenever <tt>oldcounter</tt>, the counter named in the optional - argument, is incremented. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-275.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-275.html deleted file mode 100644 index 4765fb318c0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-275.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newline</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newline</font></h1> -<p> - The <tt>\newline</tt> command breaks the line right where it is. The - <tt>\newline</tt> - command can be used only in paragraph mode. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-276.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-276.html deleted file mode 100644 index 5d8a4bd2310..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-276.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,15 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newpage</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newpage</font></h1> -<p> - The <tt>\newpage</tt> command ends the current page. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-277.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-277.html deleted file mode 100644 index bb7aa8fbaf0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-277.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newsavebox</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newsavebox</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\newsavebox{cmd}</tt> -<p> - - Declares <tt>cmd</tt>, which must be a command name that is not already - defined, to be a bin for saving boxes. -<p> - The <tt>\newsavebox</tt> command is a global - <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a>. -<p> - The <tt>\newsavebox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. -<hr> -See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> -See <a href="ltx-307.html"><tt>\sbox</tt> and <tt>\savebox</tt></a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 15 Aug 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-279.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-279.html deleted file mode 100644 index b4f1298c1a8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-279.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,19 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \nocite</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\nocite</font></h1> - <tt>\nocite{key_list}</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\nocite</tt> command produces no text, but writes key_list, which is a - list of one or more citation keys, on the aux file. -<p> - The <tt>\nocite</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. -<hr> -See also: <A href="ltx-73.html">thebibliography</A><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 4 Jul 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-280.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-280.html deleted file mode 100644 index 78ec8877b28..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-280.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,18 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \noindent</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\noindent</font></h1> - When used at the beginning of the paragraph, it suppresses the - paragraph indentation. It has no effect when used in the middle of a - paragraph. -<p> -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-247.html"><tt>\indent</tt></a><br> -See also: <A href="ltx-111.html">Making Paragraphs</A><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-281.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-281.html deleted file mode 100644 index 810ea9dffbc..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-281.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,22 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \nolinebreak</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\nolinebreak</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\nolinebreak[number]</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\nolinebreak</tt> command prevents LaTeX from breaking the current - line at the point of the command. With the optional argument, - <tt>number</tt>, you can convert the - <tt>\nolinebreak</tt> command from a demand to a - request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the - number, the more insistent the request is. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-282.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-282.html deleted file mode 100644 index beb6444b52e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-282.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \normalsize</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\normalsize</font></h1> - This is the default type size. - The size of <tt>\normalsize</tt> is defined by as 10pt unless the 11pt or 12pt - document style option is used. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, - <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-283.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-283.html deleted file mode 100644 index c6be23554e3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-283.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \nopagebreak</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\nopagebreak</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\nopagebreak[number]</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\nopagebreak</tt> command prevents LaTeX form breaking the current page - at the point of the command. With the optional argument, <tt>number</tt>, you - can convert the <tt>\nopagebreak</tt> command from a demand to a request. The - number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more - insistent the request is. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-284.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-284.html deleted file mode 100644 index 43be5c73ceb..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-284.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,18 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \onecolumn</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\onecolumn</font></h1> - The <tt>\onecolumn</tt> declaration starts a new page and produces - single-column output. -<p> -This command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-22.html">Document Styles</A><br> -See also <a href="ltx-332.html"><tt>\twocolumn</tt></a><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jul 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-286.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-286.html deleted file mode 100644 index 0abec109128..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-286.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,23 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \oval</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\oval</font></h1> - <tt>\oval(width,height)[portion]</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\oval</tt> command produces a rectangle with rounded corners. The - optional argument, <tt>portion</tt>, allows you to select part of the oval. -<ul> -<li><TT>t</TT> Selects the top portion -<li><TT>b</TT> Selects the bottom portion -<li><TT>r</TT> Selects the right portion -<li><TT>l</TT> Selects the left portion -</ul> -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</A><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-287.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-287.html deleted file mode 100644 index 879f0a4f1be..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-287.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \overbrace</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\overbrace</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\overbrace{equation}</tt> -<p> - - The <tt>\overbrace</tt> command generates a brace over - <tt>equation</tt>; math mode. -<p> - To "label" the overbrace, use a <a href="ltx-180.html">superscript</a>. -<hr> -See also: -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A> -<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A> -<li><a href="ltx-288.html"><tt>\overline</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-335.html"><tt>\underbrace</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-336.html"><tt>\underline</tt></a> -</ul> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-288.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-288.html deleted file mode 100644 index 5f973045166..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-288.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,26 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \overline</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\overline</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\overline{equation}</tt> -<p> - - The <tt>\overline</tt> command causes the argument - <tt>equation</tt> to be overlined; math mode. -<hr> -See also: -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A> -<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A> -<li><a href="ltx-287.html"><tt>\overbrace</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-335.html"><tt>\underbrace</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-336.html"><tt>\underline</tt></a> -</ul> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995. -</address> -</body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-289.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-289.html deleted file mode 100644 index d425455d209..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-289.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,22 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \pagebreak</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\pagebreak</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\pagebreak[number]</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\pagebreak</tt> command tells LaTeX to break the current page at the - point of the command. With the optional argument, <tt>number</tt>, you can - convert the <tt>\pagebreak</tt> command from a demand to a request. The number - must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more - insistent the request is. -<p> -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-29.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-29.html deleted file mode 100644 index 96782cb74ec..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-29.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX center</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">center</font></h1> -<p><pre> - \begin{center} - Text on line 1 \\ - Text on line 2 \\ - ... - ... - \end{center} -</pre> - - The center environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of - lines that are centered within the left and right margins on the - current page. Each line must be terminated with the string <tt>\\.</tt> -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-30.html"><tt>\centering</tt></A><br> -See also <a href="ltx-228.html">Flushleft</a>, - <a href="ltx-229.html">Flushright</a> Environments<br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-291.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-291.html deleted file mode 100644 index b307fdd1216..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-291.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,22 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \pageref</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\pageref</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\pageref{key}</tt> -<p> - - The <tt>\pageref</tt> command produces the page number of the place in the text - where the corresponding - <a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> command appears. -<p> -The <tt>\pageref</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. -<hr> -See also: <A href="ltx-13.html">Cross References</A><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 4 Jul 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-293.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-293.html deleted file mode 100644 index 8c3c0916b17..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-293.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \par</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\par</font></h1> - - Equivalent to a blank line; often used to make command or environment - definitions easier to read. -<hr> -See also: <A href="ltx-111.html">Making Paragraphs</A><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-294.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-294.html deleted file mode 100644 index c9801ff9e45..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-294.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \parbox</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\parbox</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\parbox[position]{width}{text}</tt> -<p> - - A parbox is a box whose contents are created in paragraph mode. The - <tt>\parbox</tt> has two mandatory arguments: -<ul> -<li> <tt>width</tt>: specifies the width of the parbox, and -<li> <tt>text</tt>: the text that goes inside the parbox. -</ul> - LaTeX will position a parbox so its center lines up with the center of - the text line. An optional first argument allows you to - line up either the top or bottom line in the parbox, by using as optional - <tt>position</tt> argument <tt>t</tt> or <tt>b</tt>, respectively . -<p> - A <tt>\parbox</tt> command is used for a parbox containing a small piece of - text, with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you shouldn't use any - of the paragraph-making environments inside a <tt>\parbox</tt> argument. For - larger pieces of text, including ones containing a paragraph-making - environment, you should use a <a href="ltx-267.html">minipage</a> environment. -<p> -The <tt>\parbox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. -<hr> -See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 Aug 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-296.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-296.html deleted file mode 100644 index acc52f00fde..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-296.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \put</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\put</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\put(x-coord,y-coord){object}</tt> -<p> - - The <tt>\put</tt> command places the <tt>object</tt> - specified by the mandatory argument at the given coordinates. -<p> -The coordinates are in units of -<a href="unitlength.html"><tt>\unitlength</tt></a> -<p> -Some of the <tt>object</tt> items you might place are -<ul> -<li><a href="ltx-257.html"><tt>\line</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-341.html"><tt>\vector</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-210.html"><tt>\circle</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-286.html"><tt>\oval</tt></a> -</ul> -See also: <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, - <A href="ltx-43.html">picture</A><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 12 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-297.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-297.html deleted file mode 100644 index 1712de6aff7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-297.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,26 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX quotation</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">quotation</font></h1> -<pre> - \begin{quotation} - text - \end{quotation} -</pre> - The margins of the quotation environment are indented on the left and - the right. The text is justified at both margins and there is - paragraph indentation. Leaving a blank line between text produces a - new paragraph. -<p> - For a short quote (one paragraph), use the - <a href="ltx-298.html">quote environment</a>. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-298.html">Quote Environment</A><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-298.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-298.html deleted file mode 100644 index 415c6a86eb2..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-298.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX quote</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">quote</font></h1> -<pre> - \begin{quote} - text - \end{quote} -</pre> - - The margins of the quote environment are indented on the left and the - right. The text is justified at both margins. For longer quotations - (more than one paragraph) use the <a href="ltx-297.html">quotation - environment</a>. - -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-297.html">Quotation Environment</A><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-299.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-299.html deleted file mode 100644 index dad37b276f5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-299.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \raggedbottom</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\raggedbottom</font></h1> - The <tt>\raggedbottom</tt> declaration makes all pages the height of the text - on that page. No extra vertical space is added. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-22.html">Document Styles</A><br> -See also <a href="ltx-227.html"><tt>\flushbottom</tt></a><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-3.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-3.html deleted file mode 100644 index 2b424b2dd68..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-3.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,88 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Counters</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Counters</font></h1> -<p> - Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The - name of the counter is the same as the name of the environment or - command that produces the number, except with no <tt>\.</tt> Below is a list - of some of the counters used in LaTeX's standard document styles to control - numbering. -<pre> - part paragraph figure enumi - chapter subparagraph table enumii - section page footnote enumiii - subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv - subsubsection -</pre> - -<h2>Manipulating the way counters are printed</h2> -Counters are printed in LaTeX by using a command generated as -"<tt>\the</tt>" suffixed with the name of the counter. Thus, equation -numbers are printed by the <tt>\theequation</tt> command, and -section numbers by the <tt>\thesection</tt> command. -If you want to change the way such numbers are printed, for example, -change from arabic to Roman numerals, you need to redefine the -appropriate command, using the -<tt><a href="ltx-18.html">\renewcommand</a></tt> command. -<p> -As an example, to number equations in an appendix as <tt>A-1</tt>, -<tt>A-2</tt>, ... , use <pre> - <tt>\renewcommand{\theequation}{A-<a href="ltx-201.html">\arabic</a>{equation}}</tt></pre> -The second argument implies that the text produced by the renewed -<tt>\theequation</tt> command will be "A-" followed by the output from -the <tt>\arabic{equation}</tt> command, which is the value of the -equation counter, printed as an arabic number. -<p> -In <a href="lists.html">List Environments</a> the format for the -item labels is given by commands like <tt>\labelitemi</tt> and -<tt>\labelitemii</tt> (for the first two levels of the -<a href="ltx-250.html">Itemize Environment</a>), and like <tt>\labelenumi</tt> -(for the <a href="ltx-222.html">Enumerate Environment</a>), and these may -also be redefined. -<p> -There is an <a href="ltx-260.html#example">example</a> of manipulating such -counters in the discussion of the List Environment. -See also the discussions in the <a href="ltx-250.html">Itemize Environment</a> -and in the <a href="ltx-222.html#example">Enumerate Environment</a>. -<p> -You can force a change in the number produced by any of the counters. For -example, if you wanted to produce a single page numbered 13, you could use -<pre> - <tt><a href="ltx-310.html">\setcounter</a>{page}{13}</tt></pre> -A variety of commands for manipulating counters this way are given below. - -<H2>Related topics</H2> -<ul> -<li>Commands that manupulate counters -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-195.html">\addtocounter</A> -<li><A href="ltx-271.html">\newcounter</A> -<li><A href="ltx-310.html">\setcounter</A> -<li><A href="ltx-338.html">\usecounter</A> -<li><A href="ltx-339.html">\value</A> -<li><a href="ltx-18.html">\renewcommand</a> -</ul> -<li>Commands that print the value of a counter in various formats -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-201.html">\arabic</A> -<li><A href="ltx-199.html">\alph \Alph</A> -<li><A href="ltx-305.html">\roman \Roman</A> -<li><A href="ltx-230.html">\fnsymbol</A> -</ul> -<li>For some examples of usage in list environments, see -<ul> -<li><a href="ltx-260.html#example">List Enviroment</a> -<li><a href="ltx-250.html">Itemize Environment</a> -<li><a href="ltx-222.html">Enumerate Environment</a> -</ul> -</ul> -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-141.html">Sectioning</a><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 25 Oct 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-30.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-30.html deleted file mode 100644 index f223a7270ba..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-30.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \centering</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\centering</font></h1> - -<p>This <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> -corresponds to the center environment. This -declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a -parbox. The text of a figure or table can be centered on the page by -putting a <tt>\centering</tt> command at the beginning of the figure or table -environment.</p> - -<p>Unlike the <a href="ltx-29.html">center environment</a>, -the <tt>\centering</tt> command does not start -a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph units. -To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the declaration -must contain the blank line or <tt>\end</tt> command (of an environment like -quote) that ends the paragraph unit.</p> - -<p><it>Editor's note: although not listed as <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a> -in Lamport, I have found it necessary to use a <tt>\protect</tt> when putting -a <tt>\centering</tt> command in a -<a href="ltx-3.html">sectioning command</a>.<br> -For example,</p> - -<pre> - <tt>\section{\protect \centering Centered section heading}</tt> -</pre> - -<hr> - -<p>See also <a href="ltx-29.html">Center environment</a><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a></p> - -<hr> - -<address> -Revised: RBS, 21 February 1997 -</address> - -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-300.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-300.html deleted file mode 100644 index 5fb17cbbba9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-300.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \raggedleft</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\raggedleft</font></h1> - This <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> - corresponds to the <a href="ltx-229.html">flushright - environment</a>. This - declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a - parbox. -<p> - Unlike the flushright environment, the <tt>\raggedleft</tt> command does not - start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph - units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the - declaration must contain the blank line or <tt>\end</tt> command (of an - environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, -<A href="ltx-229.html">flushright</A><br> -See also <a href="ltx-301.html"><tt>\raggedright</tt></a><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-301.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-301.html deleted file mode 100644 index 3d85e2cad6c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-301.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \raggedright</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\raggedright</font></h1> - This <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> - corresponds to the <a href="ltx-228.html">flushleft environment</a>. - This declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a - parbox. -<p> - Unlike the flushleft environment, the <tt>\raggedright</tt> command does not - start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph - units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the - declaration must contain the blank line or <tt>\end</tt> command (of an - environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, - <a href="ltx-29.html">Center</a>, <a href="ltx-228.html">Flushleft</a><br> -See also <a href="ltx-300.html"><tt>\raggeleft</tt></a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-302.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-302.html deleted file mode 100644 index 5b7e97253d4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-302.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \raisebox</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\raisebox</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\raisebox{distance}[extend-above][extend-below]{text}</tt> -<p> - - The <tt>\raisebox</tt> command creates a LR box containing <tt>text</tt>; - it is used to raise or lower text. The first - mandatory argument specifies how high the text is to be raised (or - lowered if it is a negative amount). -<p> - Sometimes it's useful to make LaTeX think something has a different - size than it really does - or a different size than LaTeX would - normally think it has. The <tt>\raisebox</tt> command lets you tell LaTeX how - tall it is. -<p> - The first optional argument, <tt>extend-above</tt>, makes LaTeX think that the - text extends above the current line by the amount specified. The second - optional argument, <tt>extend-below</tt>, makes LaTeX think that the text - extends below the current line by the amount specified. -<p> - <tt>\raisebox</tt> is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. -<hr> -See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 Aug 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-303.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-303.html deleted file mode 100644 index 26d4e22d60b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-303.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,27 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \ref</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\ref</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\ref{key}</tt> -<p> - - The <tt>\ref</tt> command produces the number of the sectional unit, equation - number, ... of the corresponding -<a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> command. -<p> -Bibliographic references using the -<a href="ltx-73.html"><tt>\thebibliography</tt></a> -mechanism obtain their number or label using -<a href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></a> -<p> -The <tt>\ref</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-13.html">Cross References</A><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 4 Jul 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-304.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-304.html deleted file mode 100644 index a4c495c3194..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-304.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \rm</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\rm</font></h1> -<p> - Roman typeface (default). -<p> -This is version 2.09; see also - <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a><br> -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, - <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br> -See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-305.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-305.html deleted file mode 100644 index 82de9076180..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-305.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \roman</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\roman</font></h1> - - <tt>\roman{counter}</tt> -<p> - This command causes the current value of <tt>counter</tt> to be printed - in roman numerals. - The <tt>\roman</tt> command causes lower case roman numerals, i.e., - i, ii, iii, ..., while the <tt>\Roman</tt> command causes upper case roman - numerals, i.e., I, II, III... -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 18 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-306.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-306.html deleted file mode 100644 index c9af088929a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-306.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \rule</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\rule</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\rule[raise-height]{width}{height}</tt> -<p> - - The <tt>\rule</tt> command generates a rectangular "blob of ink." - It can be used to produce horizontal or vertical lines. The arguments - are defined as follows. - <ul> - <li><TT>raise-height</TT> specifies how high to raise the rule (optional) - <li><TT>width</TT> specifies the length of the rule (mandatory) - <li><TT>height</TT> specifies the height of the rule (mandatory) - </ul> - The default value for <tt>raise-height</tt> is zero; a negative value - lowers the rule. -<p> - The reference point of the rule box is the lower left-hand corner. -<p> - A rule box of zero width may be used as a "strut" which is invisible but - which causes LaTeX to adjust veritcal spacing to leave room. This can - be particularly useful where the - <a href="ltx-347.html"><tt>\vspace</tt></a> command cannot be used, - for example, within <a href="ltx-115.html">mathematical formulas</a>. -<p> - The <tt>\rule</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. -<hr> -See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 21 Aug 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-307.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-307.html deleted file mode 100644 index 0b3f34506b1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-307.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \savebox</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\savebox</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\sbox{cmd}{text}</tt><br> - <tt>\savebox{cmd}[width][pos]{text}</tt> -<p> - These commands typeset <tt>text</tt> in a box just as for - <a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a> or - <a href="ltx-262.html"><tt>\makebox</tt></a>. - However, instead of printing the resulting box, they save it in - the LaTeX command - <tt>cmd</tt>, which must have been declared with - <a href="ltx-277.html"><tt>\newsavebox</tt></a>. - The saved <tt>text</tt> is accessed by a - <a href="ltx-337.html"><tt>\usebox</tt></a> command. -<p> - The <tt>\sbox</tt> and <tt>\savebox</tt> commands are - <a href="declarations.html">declarations</a> with the usual - rules for scope. -<p> - The <tt>\sbox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">robust</a>; - the <tt>\savebox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. -<hr> -See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> -See <a href="ltx-277.html"><tt>\newsavebox</tt></a>, - <a href="ltx-337.html"><tt>\usebox</tt></a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 15 Aug 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-308.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-308.html deleted file mode 100644 index 805a66a89c3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-308.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,20 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \sc</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\sc</font></h1> -<p> - Small caps typeface. -<p> -This is version 2.09; see also - <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a><br> -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, - <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br> -See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-309.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-309.html deleted file mode 100644 index 1096770416b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-309.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,14 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \scriptsize</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\scriptsize</font></h1> - Second smallest of 10 typefaces available. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, - <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-31.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-31.html deleted file mode 100644 index 462e493dc11..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-31.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX description</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">description</font></h1> -<p> -<p><pre> - <tt>\begin{description} - <a href="item.html">\item[label]</a> First item - \item[label] Second item - .... - \end{description}</tt> -</pre> - The description environment is used to make labeled lists. The <tt>label</tt> - is bold face and flushed right. The text of the <tt>\item</tt> command - is indented. -<p> - Typical usage is for descriptive lists - or lists of definitions; the <tt>label</tt> is then the name of the - item being described or defined. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, - <a href="lists.html">Lists</a>, - <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br> -See also <a href="ltx-222.html">Enumerate</a><br> -See also <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 18 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-310.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-310.html deleted file mode 100644 index bb877e8b1d6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-310.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,20 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \setcounter</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\setcounter</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\setcounter{counter}{value}</tt> -<p> - - The <tt>\setcounter</tt> command sets the value of the specified - <tt>counter</tt> to that - specified by the <tt>value</tt> argument. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-311.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-311.html deleted file mode 100644 index 18259f9cd11..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-311.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \settoheight</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\settoheight</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\settoheight{len-cmd}{text}</tt> -<p> - - The <tt>\settoheight</tt> command sets the value of a - <a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">length command</a>, <tt>len-cmd</tt>, - which is specified as the first argument, equal to - the maximum height of the <tt>text</tt> argument in the current font. -<p> - For example, -<pre> - <tt>\settoheight{\baselineskip}{Xanadu} - <a href="ltx-88.html">\setlength</a>{\baselineskip}{1.5\baselineskip}</tt> -</pre> -would set the value of <a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd"><tt>\baselineskip</tt></a> -to 1.5 times the height of the capital "X". -<hr> -See <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 9 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-312.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-312.html deleted file mode 100644 index 2935570cb4f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-312.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,23 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \settodepth</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\settodepth</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\settodepth{len-cmd}{text}</tt> -<p> - - The <tt>\settodepth</tt> command sets the value of a - <a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">length command</a>, <tt>len-cmd</tt>, - which is specified as the first argument, equal to - the depth (distance below the baseline) - of the <tt>text</tt> argument in the current font. -<p> -<hr> -See <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 9 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-313.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-313.html deleted file mode 100644 index e6b486554a3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-313.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,18 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \sf</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\sf</font></h1> -<p> - Sans serif typeface. -<p> -This is version 2.09; see also - <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a><br> -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, - <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br> -See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995. -</address></body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-314.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-314.html deleted file mode 100644 index bacb8e69752..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-314.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \shortstack</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\shortstack</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\shortstack[position]{ ... \\ ... \\ ... }</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\shortstack</tt> command produces a stack of objects. The valid - positions are: -<ul> -<li><TT>r</TT> Moves the objects to the right of the stack -<li><TT>l</TT> Moves the objects to the left of the stack -<li><TT>c</TT> Moves the objects to the center of the stack (default) -</ul> -<hr> -See also: <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, -<A href="ltx-43.html">picture</A><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-315.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-315.html deleted file mode 100644 index 00db42b0cfc..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-315.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \signature</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\signature</font></h1> -<tt>\signature{Your Name}</tt> -<p> - Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter underneath the - space for your signature. Items that should go on separate lines - should be separated by - <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> commands. -<hr> -See <a href="ltx-91.html">Letters</a><br> -See <a href="ltx-98.html"><tt>\closing</tt></a><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 24 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-316.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-316.html deleted file mode 100644 index 802fbac2f48..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-316.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,18 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \sl</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\sl</font></h1> -<p> - Slanted typeface. -<p> -This is version 2.09; see also - <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a><br> -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, - <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br> -See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995. -</address></body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-317.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-317.html deleted file mode 100644 index c0fc3c21b49..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-317.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,15 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \small</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\small</font></h1> - Slightly smaller than default typeface size. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, - <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-318.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-318.html deleted file mode 100644 index 7bd0ca09280..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-318.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \smallskip</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\smallskip</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\smallskip</tt> -<p> - - The <tt>\smallskip</tt> command is equivalent to - <tt><a href="ltx-347.html">\vspace</a>{\smallskipamount}</tt> where - <tt>\smallskipamount</tt> is determined by the document style. -<hr> -See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a>, - <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-319.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-319.html deleted file mode 100644 index 65392112407..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-319.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,23 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \sqrt</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\sqrt</font></h1> - <tt>\sqrt[root]{arg}</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\sqrt</tt> command produces the square root (radical) symbol with the - argument as radicand. The - optional argument, root, determines what root to produce, i.e. the - cube root of x+y would be typed as <tt>$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$</tt>. -<p> -The radical sign is <a href="ltx-408.html">variable size</a>, that is, -it is made larger if the radicand is, for example, a built-up fraction. -<hr> -See also: <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>, -<A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>.<br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-323.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-323.html deleted file mode 100644 index 4340d27eaa3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-323.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,19 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \telephone</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\telephone</font></h1> - <tt>\telephone{number}</tt> -<p> - This is your telephone number. This only appears if the firstpage - pagestyle is selected. -<hr> -See <a href="ltx-91.html">Letters</a><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 24 Jun 1995. -</address> - -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-324.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-324.html deleted file mode 100644 index 204ec9e4fb0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-324.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \thanks</title> -</head><body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\thanks</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\thanks{text}</tt> -<p> - - The <tt>\thanks</tt> command produces a footnote to the title. -<p> -It is typically used as part of the argument of a -<a href="ltx-329.html"><tt>\title</tt></a> or -<a href="ltx-203.html"><tt>\author</tt></a> command. -<p> -For example -<pre> - <tt>\title{Work in Progress - \thanks{Contribution No. 1 from our lab}} - \author{A. Author\thanks{Supported by a grant}}</tt> -</pre> -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</A>, -<A href="ltx-263.html"><tt>\maketitle</tt></A>.<br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 15 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-328.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-328.html deleted file mode 100644 index f247468637f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-328.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,16 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \tiny</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\tiny</font></h1> - Smallest of 10 typefaces available. All fonts may not be available in - this size. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, - <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-329.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-329.html deleted file mode 100644 index 74902fc9774..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-329.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \title</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\title</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\title{text}</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\title</tt> command declares <tt>text</tt> to be the title. Use - <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> to tell - LaTeX where to start a new line in a long title. -<p> - A footnote to a title is produced with the - <a href="ltx-324.html"><tt>\thanks</tt></a> command. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</A>, - <a href="ltx-78.html">Titlepage Environment</a><br> -See also <A href="ltx-263.html"><tt>\maketitle</tt></A><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 Nov 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-330.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-330.html deleted file mode 100644 index 49513cecc87..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-330.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,16 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head> -<title>Help On LaTeX \today</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\today</font></h1> -The command <tt>\today</tt> generates the current date in the -format Month dd, year. -<hr> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-331.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-331.html deleted file mode 100644 index 917ba0a38ea..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-331.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,20 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \tt</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\tt</font></h1> -<p> - Typewriter typeface. -<p> -This is version 2.09; see also - <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a><br> -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>, - <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br> -See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-332.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-332.html deleted file mode 100644 index c98b9e94dac..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-332.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,18 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \twocolumn</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\twocolumn</font></h1> - The <tt>\twocolumn</tt> declaration starts a new page and produces two-column - output. -<p> - This command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-22.html">Document Styles</A><br> -See also <a href="ltx-284.html"><tt>\onecolumn</tt></a><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jul 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-335.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-335.html deleted file mode 100644 index 38dabf514d9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-335.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \underbrace</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\underbrace</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\underbrace{formula}</tt> -<p> - - The <tt>\underbrace</tt> command generates a brace underneath - the <tt>formula</tt>; math mode. -<p> -To "label" the underbrace, use a <a href="ltx-179.html">subscript</a>. -<hr> -See also: -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A> -<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A> -<li><a href="ltx-287.html"><tt>\overbrace</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-288.html"><tt>\overline</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-336.html"><tt>\underline</tt></a> -</ul> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-336.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-336.html deleted file mode 100644 index ceefcd24112..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-336.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \underline</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\underline</font></h1> - <tt>\underline{text}</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\underline</tt> command causes the argument text to be underlined. This - command can be used in math mode, paragraph mode, and LR mode. -<p> -This command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a> although the -<a href="ltx-288.html"><tt>\overline</tt></a> command is robust. -<hr> -See also: -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A> -<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A> -<li><a href="ltx-287.html"><tt>\overbrace</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-288.html"><tt>\overline</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-335.html"><tt>\underbrace</tt></a> -</ul> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 July 1995. -</address> - -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-337.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-337.html deleted file mode 100644 index f4e30f67bc1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-337.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,23 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \usebox</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\usebox</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\usebox{cmd}</tt> -<p> - - Prints the box most recently saved in <tt>cmd by</tt> a -<a href="ltx-307.html"><tt>\savebox</tt> or <tt>\sbox</tt></a> command. -<p> - The <tt>\usebox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">robust</a>. -<hr> -See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> -See <a href="ltx-277.html"><tt>\newsavebox</tt></a>, - <a href="ltx-307.html"><tt>\savebox</tt></a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 Aug 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-338.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-338.html deleted file mode 100644 index 64db37f4f6b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-338.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,22 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \usecounter</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\usecounter</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\usecounter{counter}</tt> -<p> - - The <tt>\usecounter</tt> command is used in the second argument of the - <a href="ltx-260.html">list environment</a> - to allow the counter specified to be used to number the - list items. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A>, - <a href="ltx-260.html">list environment</a><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 18 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-339.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-339.html deleted file mode 100644 index a1c52a55300..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-339.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,27 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \value</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\value</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\value{counter}</tt> -<p> - - The <tt>\value</tt> command produces the value of the counter named in the - mandatory argument. It can be used where LaTeX expects an integer or - number, such as the second argument of a - <a href="ltx-310.html"><tt>\setcounter</tt></a> or - <a href="ltx-195.html"><tt>\addtocounter</tt></a> command, or in -<pre> - <tt>\hspace{\value{foo}<a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">\parindent}</a></tt> -</pre> - It is useful for doing arithmetic with counters. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A>, - <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 9 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-340.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-340.html deleted file mode 100644 index 0f32746eb98..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-340.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \vdots</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\vdots</font></h1> - The <tt>\vdots</tt> command produces a vertical ellipsis.<br> - Can be used only in math mode. -<hr> -See also: -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-207.html">\cdots</A> -<li><A href="ltx-218.html">\ddots</A> -<li><A href="ltx-256.html">\ldots</A> -<li><A href="ltx-340.html">\vdots</A> -<p> -<li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>, -<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>. -</ul> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 25 April 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-341.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-341.html deleted file mode 100644 index 93240e1509c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-341.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \vector</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\vector</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\vector(x-slope,y-slope){length}</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\vector</tt> command draws an arrow of the specified length and slope - with the arrow head at the opposite end of the line from the - reference point (see <a href="ltx-296.html"><tt>\put</tt></a>). -<p> -The slope is determined by <tt>(x-slope,y-slope)</tt> which are signed -integers of magnitude less than or equal to 4 and which have no common -divisor except for plus or minus one; For example (1,0) is a horizontal -arrow pointing right; (1,1) gives a slope of -45 degress; (0,1) is a vertical arrow pointing up; (-1,1) is at 135 degrees. -<p> -The <strong>horizontal</strong> extent of the arrow is given by the -<tt>length</tt> parameter, except in the case of a vertical arrow in -which case <tt>length</tt> specifies the vertical height. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, - <A href="ltx-43.html">picture</A><br> -See also <a href="ltx-257.html"><tt>\line</tt></a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 12 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-342.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-342.html deleted file mode 100644 index 65cad2f1b0c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-342.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \verb</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\verb</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\verb char literal_text char</tt><br> -or<br> - <tt>\verb*char literal_text char</tt><p> - - Typesets <tt>literal_text</tt> exactly as typed, - including special characters - and spaces, using a typewriter (<tt>\tt</tt>) font. There may be no - space between <tt>\verb</tt> or <tt>\verb*</tt> - and <tt>char</tt> (space is shown here only for - clarity). The *-form differs only in that spaces are printed - as "visual" spaces, i.e., a short, squat "u". -<p> - Any <tt>char</tt> except a space (or a <tt>*</tt> for the <tt>\verb</tt> - form) may be chosen as the delimiter. Thus, the input -<pre> - \verb1This!is?the##1 verbatim ... -</pre> -would produce<p> - -<tt>This!is?the##</tt> verbatim ... -<p> -The <tt>\verb</tt> command may <strong>not</strong> be used in the argument -of another command. For example, it cannot be used in the text of a -<a href="ltx-141.html">sectioning command</a>. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, - <A href="ltx-79.html">verbatim</A><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 20 Oct 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-345.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-345.html deleted file mode 100644 index 7b0b0ec05e0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-345.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,20 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \vfill</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\vfill</font></h1> -<p> - The <tt>\vfill</tt> fill command produces a - <a href="ltx-86.html#rubber">rubber length</a> which can stretch or - shrink vertically. It is equivalent to a blank line followed by - <tt><a href="ltx-347.html">\vspace</a>\fill</tt>. It should be used only - in <a href="ltx-130.html">paragraph mode</a>. -<hr> -See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a>, - <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Oct 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-346.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-346.html deleted file mode 100644 index 6e3bc2ba17e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-346.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \vline</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\vline</font></h1> - The <tt>\vline</tt> command will draw a vertical line extending the full height - and depth of its row. An <tt><a href="ltx-238.html">\hfill</a></tt> command - can be used to move the line - to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an @-expression. -<hr> -See also: <a href="ltx-202.html">array</a>, -<A href="ltx-68.html">tabular</A><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995. -</address> -</body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-347.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-347.html deleted file mode 100644 index d643dc901ba..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-347.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \vspace</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\vspace</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\vspace[*]{length}</tt> -<p> - - The <tt>\vspace</tt> command adds vertical space. The length of the space can - be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands, i.e., points, - inches, etc. You can add negative as well as positive space with an - <tt>\vspace</tt> command. -<p> - If <tt>\vspace</tt> appears in the middle of a paragraph the space - is added after the line containing it. -<p> - LaTeX removes vertical space that comes at the end of a page. If you - don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the optional * - argument. Then the space is never removed. -<hr> -See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a>, - <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 14 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-37.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-37.html deleted file mode 100644 index fe16097d0f2..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-37.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \raggedright</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\raggedright</font></h1> - This <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> - corresponds to the <a href="ltx-228.html">flushleft environment</a>. This - declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a - parbox. -<p> - Unlike the flushleft environment, the <tt>\raggedright</tt> command does not - start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph - units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the - declaration must contain the blank line or <tt>\end</tt> command (of an - environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit. -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-228.html">flushleft environment</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-39.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-39.html deleted file mode 100644 index a9a1a1ca3c1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-39.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \raggedleft</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\raggedleft</font></h1> -<p> - This <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> - corresponds to the <a href="ltx-229.html">flushright environment</a>. This - declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a - parbox. -<p> - Unlike the flushright environment, the <tt>\raggedleft</tt> command does not - start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph - units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the - declaration must contain the blank line or <tt>\end</tt> command (of an - environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit. -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-229.html">flushright environment</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-401.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-401.html deleted file mode 100644 index 3acd2e45614..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-401.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,96 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head> -<title>Accents</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Accents</font></h1> -The rules differ somewhat depending whether you are in -<a href="ltx-130.html">text mode</a>, <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math -mode</a>, or the <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing environment</a> - -<h2>Text mode</h2> -The following accents may be placed on letters. Although "o" is used in -most of the example, the accents may be placed on any letter. -Accents may even be placed above a "missing" letter; for example, -<tt>\~{}</tt> produces a tilde over a blank space. -<p> -The following commands may be used only in paragraph or LR mode.<br> -<ul> -<li><tt>\`{o}</tt> produces a grave accent, ò -<li><tt>\'{o}</tt> produces an acute accent, ó -<li><tt>\^{o}</tt> produces a circumflex, ô -<li><tt>\"{o}</tt> produces an umlaut or dieresis, ö -<li><tt>\H{o}</tt> produces a long Hungarian umlaut -<li><tt>\~{o}</tt> produces a tilde, õ -<li><tt>\c{c}</tt> produces a cedilla, ç -<li><tt>\={o}</tt> produces a macron accent (a bar over the letter) -<li><tt>\b{o}</tt> produces a bar under the letter -<li><tt>\.{o}</tt> produces a dot over the letter -<li><tt>\d{o}</tt> produces a dot under the letter -<li><tt>\u{o}</tt> produces a breve over the letter -<li><tt>\v{o}</tt> produces a "v" over the letter -<li><tt>\t{oo}</tt> produces a "tie" (inverted u) over the two letters -</ul> -<p> -Note that the letters "i" and "j" require special treatment when -they are given accents because it is often desirable to replace the -dot with the accent. For this purpose, the commands <tt>\i</tt> and -<tt>\j</tt> can be used to produce dotless letters.<p> -For example, -<ul> -<li><tt>\^{\i}</tt> should be used for i, circumflex, î -<li><tt>\"{\i}</tt> should be used for i, umlaut, ï -</ul> - -<h2><a name="math">Math mode</a></h2> -Several of the above and some similar accents can also be -produced in math mode. The following commands may be used <strong>only</strong> -in math mode. -<ul> -<li><tt>\hat{o}</tt> is similar to the circumflex (cf. <tt>\^</tt>) -<li><tt>\widehat{oo}</tt> is a wide version of <tt>\hat</tt> over several letters -<li><tt>\check{o}</tt> is a vee or check (cf. <tt>\v</tt>) -<li><tt>\tilde{o}</tt> is a tilde (cf. <tt>\~</tt>) -<li><tt>\widetilde{oo}</tt> is a wide version - of <tt>\tilde</tt> over several letters -<li><tt>\acute{o}</tt> is an acute accent (cf. <tt>\`</tt>) -<li><tt>\grave{o}</tt> is a grave accent (cf. <tt>\'</tt>) -<li><tt>\dot{o}</tt> is a dot over the letter (cf. <tt>\.</tt>) -<li><tt>\ddot{o}</tt> is a double dot over the letter -<li><tt>\breve{o}</tt> is a breve (cf. <tt>\u</tt>) -<li><tt>\bar{o}</tt> is a macron (cf. <tt>\=</tt>) -<li><tt>\vec{o}</tt> is a vector (arrow) over the letter -</ul> - -<h2><a href="ltx-58.html">Tabbing environment</a></h2> -Some of the accent marks used in running text have other uses in -the <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing environment</a>. In that -case they can be created with the following command: -<ul> -<li><tt>\a'</tt> for an acute accent -<li><tt>\a`</tt> for a grave accent -<li><tt>\a=</tt> for a macron accent -</ul> -<hr> -Related topics: -<ul> -<li><a href="ltx-405.html">Greek letters</a> -<li><a href="ltx-402.html">Ligatures and Non-English symbols</a> -<li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a> -<p> -<li><a href="ltx-287.html"><tt>\overbrace</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-288.html"><tt>\overline</tt></a> -<p> -<li><a href="ltx-115.html#math">Math environment</a> -<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a> and - <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a> -<li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size symbols</a> -</ul> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 20 Oct 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> - diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-402.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-402.html deleted file mode 100644 index 500c3d7b99a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-402.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head> -<title>Non-English characters and ligatures</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Non-English characters and ligatures</font></h1> - -These commands may be used only in paragraph or LR mode.<br> -<ul> -<li><tt>\ae</tt> small ae ligature (diphthong), æ -<li><tt>\AE</tt> capital ae ligature, Æ -<li><tt>\oe</tt> small oe ligature -<li><tt>\OE</tt> capital OE ligature -<li><tt>\aa</tt> small a, ring, å -<li><tt>\AA</tt> capital A, ring, Å -<li><tt>\o</tt> small o, slash, ø -<li><tt>\O</tt> capital O, slash, Ø -<li><tt>\ss</tt> German sz ligature, ß -</ul> -<p> -<h2>Non-English punctuation</h2> -An inverted "question mark" is made by <tt>?`</tt>. It will also be -generated by a <tt>></tt> in text mode. -<p> -An inverted "exclamation point" is made by <tt>!`</tt>. It will also be -generated by a <tt><</tt> in text mode. -<hr> -Related topics: -<ul> -<li> <a href="ltx-401.html">Accents</a>, -<li> <a href="ltx-405.html">Greek letters</a> -<li> <a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a> -</ul> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> - diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-403.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-403.html deleted file mode 100644 index 0f74a6048f1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-403.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,116 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head> -<title>Delimiters</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Delimiters</font></h1> -Delimiters are objects which act logically like parentheses. These can -be used only in math mode. -<p> -The delimiters recognized by LaTeX include -<ul> -<li><tt>(</tt> (left parenthesis) -<li><tt>)</tt> (right parenthesis) -<li><tt>[</tt> (left bracket) -<li><tt>]</tt> (right bracket) -<li><tt>\{</tt> (left brace) -<li><tt>\}</tt> (right brace) -<li><tt>|</tt> (vertical line) -<li><tt>\vert</tt> (vertical line) -<li><tt>\|</tt> (double vertical lines) -<li><tt>\Vert</tt> (double vertical lines) -<li><tt>/</tt> (slash) -<li><tt><a href="ltx-164.html">\backslash</a></tt> (backslash) -<li><tt>\langle</tt> (left angle bracket) -<li><tt>\rangle</tt> (right angle bracket) -<li><tt>\uparrow</tt> (uparrow) -<li><tt>\downarrow</tt> (down arrow) -<li><tt>\updownarrow</tt> (up/down arrow) -</ul> - -<h2><a name="big">Making delimiters the right size</a></h2> -Delimiters in formulas should be big enough to "fit" around the formulas -they delimit (for example arround arrays). -To obtain "stretchable" delimiters (LaTeX makes them the -appropriate size) type a <tt>\left</tt> or <tt>\right</tt> command before -the delimiter. <tt>\left</tt> and <tt>\right</tt> commands must come in -matching pairs, although the delimiters themselves need not be the same. -Thus, <pre> \left \{ ... \right \[ </pre> produces a legal pair. -In cases where only one delimiter is desired, it -is possible to make the matching delimiter "invisible" by typing a -period (<tt>.</tt>) after the command, i.e., -<tt>\left.</tt> or <tt>\right.</tt>. -<p> -In an <a href="ltx-223.html">eqnarray environment</a> the matching <tt>\left</tt> -and <tt>\right</tt> cannot be split between lines and it may be necessary to -use an "invisible" <tt>\right.</tt> and <tt>\left.</tt> to terminate and -begin parts on different lines. In this case a second problem may arise, -since the size of the delimiters will be chosen only for the -<strong>local part</strong>, so that the size of the <strong>visible</strong> -"left" and "right" delimiters might not match. -The solution is to trick LaTeX into thinking -that both parts have the same vertical height. This can be done by placing -a strut, that is a zero-width <a href="ltx-306.html"><tt>\rule</tt></a>. It -can also be accomplished with the <tt>\vphantom</tt> command, which I have -not found documented, but which appears to work. -<p> -<pre><tt>\vphantom{construct}</tt></pre> -creates a zero-width object with the height of <tt>construct</tt>. The -argument can contain things such as <a href="ltx-235.html"><tt>\frac</tt></a> -or the <a href="ltx-408.html">variable size math symbols</a> and should -be chosen according to what is in the section with the delimiter you want to match. - -<h2>Some examples</h2> -<h3>A six-j symbol</h3> -<pre> - <tt>\[ \left<a href="ltx-164.html">\{</a> - \begin{<a href="ltx-202.html">array</a>}{ccc} - a & b & c <a href="ltx-181.html">\\</a> - d & e & f \end{array} - \right<a href="ltx-164.html">\}</a> \]</tt> -</pre> -This should be displayed something like (insofar as it can be rendered in -"ascii art"): -<pre> - ( a b c ) - - - - ( d e f ) -</pre> -Note that the <tt>\[ ... \]</tt> set this off as <a href="ltx-421.html"> -Display Math</a>, and that the <a href="ltx-202.html">Array Environment</a> -is used to generate the three centered columns inside the braces. -<h3>A "multiple choice" equation</h3> -<pre> - <tt>\[ f(x) = - \left\{ \begin{array}{l} - 0, x < 0 \\ 1, x = 0 \\ - 2, x > 0 \end{array} \right. \]</tt> -</pre> -will be displayed as -<pre> -<tt> ( 0, x < 0 - f(x) = - 1, x = 0 - ( 2, x > 0</tt> -</pre> -Note that the "invisible" <tt>\right</tt> delimiter is specified using -a "period". -<hr> -See also: -See also <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>, - <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational operators</a> -<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math formulas</a>, -<li><a href="ltx-202.html">Arrays</a> -<li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a> -<li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size symbols (sums, integrals, etc.)</a> -</ul> -<hr> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Nov 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> - diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-404.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-404.html deleted file mode 100644 index 9016b0b2018..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-404.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,75 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head> -<title>Binary and relational opertors</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Binary and relational operators</font></h1> -Some "math" symbols are obtained by typing the corresponding keyboard -character. Examples include -<pre> + - = < > </pre> -<strong>Note:</strong> plus, minus, and equal sign may be used in -either text or math mode, but < and > are math mode only -(they produce inverted exclamation and question marks, respectively, -in text mode). -<p> -The following commands may be used only in math mode. - -<ul> -<li><tt>\pm</tt> plus or minus sign -<li><tt>\mp</tt> minus or plus sign -<li><tt>\times</tt> times (an "x") -<li><tt>\div</tt> divided by sign -<li><tt>\ast</tt> an asterisk (centered) -<li><tt>\star</tt> a five-point star (centered) -<li><tt>\bullet</tt> a bullet -<li><tt>\circ</tt> an open bullet -<li><tt>\cdot</tt> a centered dot (see also, - <a href="ltx-207.html"><tt>\cdots</tt></a>) -<p> -<li><tt>\leq</tt> less than or equal to -<li><tt>\ll</tt> much less than -<li><tt>\subset</tt> is a subset of -<li><tt>\geq</tt> greater than or equal to -<li><tt>\gg</tt> much greater than -<li><tt>\equiv</tt> equivalence symbol -<li><tt>\sim</tt> similar to -<li><tt>\simeq</tt> similar or equal to -<li><tt>\approx</tt> approximately equal to -<li><tt>\neq</tt> not equal to -<li><tt>\per</tt> "perpendicular to" symbols -<li><tt>\propto</tt> proportional to -</ul> -<p> -Note that "greater than" and "less than" are obtained simply by -entering <tt>></tt> and <tt><</tt>. -<p> -A slash, indicating <a name=not>"not"</a> can be placed through a symbol -(or a letter) with the <tt>\not</tt> command. For example, not less than is -<pre> \not< -</pre> -and not less than or equal to is -<pre> \not\leq -</pre> -If the slash isn't properly positioned it can be moved by putting a -<a href="ltx-118.html">math mode spacing command</a> between the <tt>\not</tt> -and the symbol. -<p> -Related topics: -<ul> -<li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a> -<li><a href="ltx-403.html">Delimiters</a> -<li><a href="ltx-405.html">Greek letters</a> -<li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a> -<li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size symbols</a> (sums, integrals, etc.) -</ul> -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>, - <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 7Jul 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> - diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-405.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-405.html deleted file mode 100644 index 2d7bda376e4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-405.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,72 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head> -<title>Greek letters</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Greek letters</font></h1> - -These commands may be used only in math mode. -<h2>Lower case</h2> -<ul> -<li><tt>\alpha</tt> -<li><tt>\beta</tt> -<li><tt>\gamma</tt> -<li><tt>\delta</tt> -<li><tt>\epsilon</tt> -<li><tt>\varepsilon</tt> (variation, script-like) -<li><tt>\zeta</tt> -<li><tt>\eta</tt> -<li><tt>\theta</tt> -<li><tt>\vartheta</tt> (variation, script-like) -<li><tt>\iota</tt> -<li><tt>\kappa</tt> -<li><tt>\lambda</tt> -<li><tt>\mu</tt> -<li><tt>\nu</tt> -<li><tt>\xi</tt> -<li><tt>\pi</tt> -<li><tt>\varpi</tt> (variation) -<li><tt>\rho</tt> -<li><tt>\varrho</tt> (variation, with the tail) -<li><tt>\sigma</tt> -<li><tt>\varsigma</tt> (variation, script-like) -<li><tt>\tau</tt> -<li><tt>\upsilon</tt> -<li><tt>\phi</tt> -<li><tt>\varphi</tt> (variation, script-like) -<li><tt>\chi</tt> -<li><tt>\psi</tt> -<li><tt>\omega</tt> -</ul> -<h2>Capital letters</h2> -<ul> -<li><tt>\Gamma</tt> -<li><tt>\Delta</tt> -<li><tt>\Theta</tt> -<li><tt>\Lambda</tt> -<li><tt>\Xi</tt> -<li><tt>\Pi</tt> -<li><tt>\Sigma</tt> -<li><tt>\Upsilon</tt> -<li><tt>\Phi</tt> -<li><tt>\Psi</tt> -<li><tt>\Omega</tt> -</ul> -<hr> -See also: -See also <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>, - <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="ltx-401.html">Accents</a> -<li><a href="ltx-402.html">Ligatures and Non-English symbols</a> -<li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a> -<li><a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a> -</ul> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jul 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> - diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-406.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-406.html deleted file mode 100644 index 24c60007829..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-406.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,58 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head> -<title>Arrows</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Arrows</font></h1> -Latex provides commands for all sorts of arrows. The following commands -are used only in math mode. -<p> -In general the command names are created from "left", "right", "up", or -"down". "leftright" gives a double headed arrow. -Prefacing with "long" gives a longer arrow. Capitalizing the -first letter gives a double-shanked arrow. -<p> -Examples are -<ul> -<li><tt>\leftarrow</tt> -<li><tt>\Leftarrow</tt> -<li><tt>\longleftarrow</tt> -<li><tt>\Longleftarrow</tt> -<p> -<li><tt>\rightarrow</tt> -<li><tt>\Rightarrow</tt> -<li><tt>\longrightarrow</tt> -<li><tt>\Longrightarrow</tt> -<p> -<li><tt>\leftrightarrow</tt> -<li><tt>\Leftrightarrow</tt> -<li><tt>\longleftrightarrow</tt> -<p> -<li><tt>\uparrow</tt> -<li><tt>\downarrow</tt> -<li><tt>\Uparrow</tt> -<p> -<li><tt>\nearrow</tt> points from southwest to northeast -<li><tt>\searrow</tt> points from northwest to southeast -<li><tt>\swarrow</tt> points from northeast to southwest -<li><tt>\nwarrow</tt> points from southeast to northwest -</ul> -The <a href="stackrel.html"><tt>\stackrel</tt></a> command is -useful for putting things over or under your arrow. -<hr> -See also: -See also <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>, - <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational operators</a> -<li><a href="ltx-405.html">Greek letters</a> -<li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a> -<li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size symbols</a> (sums, integrals, etc.) -</ul> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jull 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-407.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-407.html deleted file mode 100644 index e2340140b50..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-407.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,90 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head> -<title>Miscellaneous symbols</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Miscellaneous symbols</font></h1> - -<h2>Some symbols for math</h2> -The following symbols are also used only in math mode -<ul> -<li><tt>\aleph</tt> Hebrew aleph -<li><tt>\hbar</tt> h-bar, Planck's constant -<li><tt>\imath</tt> variation on "i"; no dot -<ul><li>See also <a href="ltx-401.html"><tt>\i</tt></a></ul> -<li><tt>\jmath</tt> variation on "j"; no dot -<ul><li>See also <a href="ltx-401.html"><tt>\j</tt></a></ul> -<li><tt>\ell</tt> script (loop) "l" -<li><tt>\wp</tt> fancy script lowercase "P" -<li><tt>\Re</tt> script capital "R" ("Real") -<li><tt>\Im</tt> script capital "I" ("Imaginary") -<li><tt>\prime</tt> prime (also obtained by typing <tt>'</tt>) -<li><tt>\nabla</tt> inverted capital Delta -<li><tt>\surd</tt> radical (square root) symbol -<li><tt>\angle</tt> angle symbol -<li><tt>\forall</tt> "for all" (inverted A) -<li><tt>\exists</tt> "exists" (left-facing E) -<li><a href="ltx-164.html"><tt>\backslash</tt></a> backslash -<li><tt>\partial</tt> partial derivative symbol -<li><tt>\infty</tt> infinity symbol -<li><tt>\triangle</tt> open triangle symbol -<li><tt>\Box</tt> open square -<li><tt>\Diamond</tt> open diamond -<p> -<li><tt>\flat</tt> music: flat symbol -<li><tt>\natural</tt> music: natural symbol -<li><tt>\sharp</tt> music: sharp symbol -<p> -<li><tt>\clubsuit</tt> playing cards: club suit symbol -<li><tt>\diamondsuit</tt> playing cards: diamond suit symbol -<li><tt>\heartsuit</tt> playing cards: heart suit symbol -<li><tt>\spadesuit</tt> playing cards: space suit symbol -</ul> - -<h2>Some other symbols</h2> -The following symbols can be used in any mode. -<ul> -<li><tt>\dag</tt> dagger -<li><tt>\ddag</tt> double dagger -<li><tt>\S</tt> section symbol -<li><tt>\P</tt> paragraph symbol -<li><tt>\copyright</tt> copyright symbol -<li><tt>\pounds</tt> British pound sterling symbol -</ul> - -<h2>Calligraphic style letters</h2> -Twenty-six calligraphic letters are provided (the upper case alphabet). These -can only be used in math mode.<p> -In LaTeX 2.09 they are produced with the <tt>\cal</tt> -<a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> -<pre> - <tt>${\cal A}$</tt> -</pre> - - In LaTeX2e they are obtained with the <tt>\mathcal</tt> command: -<pre> - <tt>$\mathcal{CAL}$</tt> -</pre> -<hr> -See also: -See also <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>, - <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a>, - <a href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a> -<li><a href="ltx-403.html">Delimiters</a> -<li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational operators</a> -<li><a href="ltx-405.html">Greek letters</a> -<li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size symbols</a> (sums, integrals, etc.) -<li><a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a> -<p> -<li><a href="stackrel.html"><tt>\stackrel</tt></a> (putting things above - other things) -</ul> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jul 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-408.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-408.html deleted file mode 100644 index ede35a461ac..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-408.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,79 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head> -<title>Variable size symbols</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Variable size symbols</font></h1> -The size of some mathematical symbols, notably summation signs, product signs, and -integral signs, depends on the environment in which they -appear (i.e., <tt>displaymath</tt> as opposed to <tt>math</tt> environments; -see <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a> and -<a href="mathfonts.html">Math Fonts and Styles</a>). -<p> -These include -<ul> -<li><tt>\sum</tt> a summation sign (capital sigma) -<li><tt>\prod</tt> a product (capital pi) -<li><tt>\coprod</tt> a coproduct (inverted capital pi) -<li><tt>\int</tt> an integral sign -<li><tt>\oint</tt> a surface (circular) integral sign -<li><tt>\bigcup</tt> big "U" -<li><tt>\bigcap</tt> big inverted "U" -<li><tt>\bigvee</tt> big "V" -<li><tt>\bigwedge</tt> big inverted "V" -<li><tt>\bigodot</tt> big "O" with dot at center -<li><tt>\bigotimes</tt> big "O" with cross inside -<li><tt>\bigoplus</tt> big "O" with a + inside -<li><tt>\biguplus</tt> big "U" with a + inside -</ul> -The <a href="ltx-319.html"><tt>\sqrt</tt></a> command also produces a variable -size symbol appropriate for the size of hte radicand argument. -<p> -<p> -The "limits" associated with these symbols are entered as -<a href="ltx-179.html">subscripts</a> for entries appearing below the -symbol and as <a href="ltx-180.html">superscripts</a> for entries appearing -above the symbol. -For example the sum from n=0 to infinity of x<sub>n</sub> would be entered as -<pre> - \sum_{n=0}^{<a href="ltx-407.html">\infty</a>} x_{n} -</pre> -The actual placement of the limits depends on whether this -is in <tt>displaymath</tt> mode in which case they are placed below/above -or in <tt>math</tt> mode in running text in which case they are placed as regular -subscripts and superscripts. -<p> -Note that it is possible to treat several of these symbols (a common example -would be a double sum) as a single symbol for placing limits above and/or -below by using the <a href="stackrel.html#mathop"><tt>\mathop</tt></a> command. -<p> -"Hats" and "tildes" over symbols which stretch (as best they can) to -the correct size for their arguments are produced by -<a href="ltx-401.html#math"><tt>\widehat</tt> and <tt>\widetilde</tt></a>. -<hr> -Related topics: -<ul> -<li><a href="ltx-403.html">Delimiters</a> can be made variable sized -<li><a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a> -<p> -<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a> -<li><a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a> -<li><a href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</a> -<li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a> -<li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational operators</a> -<li><a href="ltx-409.html">Math function symbols</a> -<li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a> -<p> -<li><a href="ltx-403.html#big"><tt>\left</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-403.html#big"><tt>\right</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-319.html"><tt>\sqrt</tt></a> -<li><a href="stackrel.html"><tt>\stackrel</tt> and <tt>\mathop</tt></a> -</ul> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Nov 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> - diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-409.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-409.html deleted file mode 100644 index 468ee7918d0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-409.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,76 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head> -<title>Math function symbols</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Math function symbols</font></h1> -Functions like "log" or "cos" are normally used in math mode. However, in -math mode strings of letters are treated as a product of variables, which -would normally be displayed in math italics rather than a text font which -would be appropriate for these functions. To -get proper display of such functions they are generated with LaTeX commands. -<p> -Some of these commands are -<ul> -<li><tt>\arccos</tt> -<li><tt>\arcsin</tt> -<li><tt>\arctan</tt> -<li><tt>\cos</tt> -<li><tt>\cosh</tt> -<li><tt>\cot</tt> -<li><tt>\coth</tt> -<li><tt>\csc</tt> -<li><tt>\deg</tt> -<li><tt>\det</tt> -<li><tt>\dim</tt> -<li><tt>\exp</tt> -<li><tt>\gcd</tt> -<li><tt>\hom</tt> -<li><tt>\inf</tt> -<li><tt>\ker</tt> -<li><tt>\lg</tt> -<li><tt>\lim</tt> -<li><tt>\liminf</tt> -<li><tt>\limsup</tt> -<li><tt>\ln</tt> -<li><tt>\log</tt> -<li><tt>\max</tt> -<li><tt>\min</tt> -<li><tt>\sec</tt> -<li><tt>\sin</tt> -<li><tt>\sinh</tt> -<li><tt>\sup</tt> -<li><tt>\tan</tt> -<li><tt>\tanh</tt> -</ul> -Two commands are provided for the "modulus" function -<ul> -<li><tt>\bmod</tt> -<li><tt>\pmod{}</tt> -</ul> -The former would be used to write "a mod b" as -<pre> a \bmod b -</pre> -and the latter, which requires an argument that is displayed in parentheses, -would be used to write "n = i (mod j)" as -<pre> n = i \pmod{j} -</pre> - -<p> -Related topics: -<ul> -<li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a> -<li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational operators</a> -<li><a href="ltx-403.html">Delimiters</a> -<li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a> -<li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size symbols</a> -</ul> -<hr> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 25 April 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> - diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-420.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-420.html deleted file mode 100644 index a2f26a22b28..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-420.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,26 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Abstract Environment</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Abstract environment</font></h1> -In the article or report <a href="ltx-22.html">document style</a>, the -abstract is produced by the abstract environment: -<pre> - <tt>\begin{abstract} - Abstract text, set in the usual - LaTeX paragraph mode. - - An empy line, for example, specifies - a new paragraph - \end{abstract}</tt> -</pre> -The abstract is typically set with a narrower page margin. - -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-27.html">LaTeX environments</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-421.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-421.html deleted file mode 100644 index 8f92d8e2580..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-421.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,54 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Displaymath</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Displaymath</font></h1> - - There are four environments that put LaTeX in math mode: - <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math</a>, - displaymath, <a href="ltx-223.html">eqnarray</a>, - and <a href="ltx-224.html">equation</a>. - The math environment is for formulas that - appear right in the text. The displaymath and equation environments are - for formulas that appear on their own line; they differ only insofar - as the latter prints an equation number. LaTeX will <strong>not</strong> - break lines in displaymath or equation environments unless told to do - so with a <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> command. -<p> - The displaymath environment can be entered by -<pre> - <tt>\begin{displaymath} - math equation \\ - second line of math equation - \end{displaymath}</tt> -</pre> -Because displaymath may be used frequently to display relatively -short equations, there are convenient alternative forms: -<pre> - <tt>\[ displayed math equation \]</tt> -</pre> -or (the following does not seem to be well documented, but appears to work) -<pre> - <tt>$$ dispalyed math equation $$</tt> -</pre> -<hr> -Related topics -<ul> -<li><a href="ltx-115.html#math">Math environment</a> -<li><a href="ltx-223.html">Eqnarray environment</a> -<li><a href="ltx-224.html">Equation environment</a> -<p> -<li><a href="ltx-130.html">LaTeX Modes</a> -<p> -<li><A href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</A> -<li><A href="ltx-179.html">Subscripts</A> and - <a href="ltx-180.html">Superscripts</a> -<li><A href="ltx-118.html">Spacing in Math Mode</A> -<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A> -</ul> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-43.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-43.html deleted file mode 100644 index 61de1ff618a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-43.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,107 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX picture</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Picture environment</font></h1> -<p> -<p><pre> - \begin{picture}(width,height)(x-offset,y-offset) - ... - picture commands - ... - \end{picture} -</pre> -<p> - The picture environment allows you to create just about any kind of - picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles. You tell - LaTeX where to put things in the picture by specifying their - coordinates. A coordinate is a number that may have a decimal point - and a minus sign (<tt>-</tt>), for example, 5, 2.3, or -3.1416. A coordinate - specifies a length in multiples of the unit length - <a href="unitlength.html"><tt>\unitlength</tt></a>, so if - <tt>\unitlength</tt> has been set to 1cm, then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a - length of 2.54 centimeters. You can change the value of <tt>\unitlength</tt> - anywhere you want, using the - <a href="ltx-88.html"><tt>\setlength</tt></a> command, - but it should be set before the beginning of the picture environment since - strange things may happen if you try changing it inside the picture environment. -<p> - A position is a pair of coordinates, such as (2.4,-5), specifying the - point with x-coordinate = 2.4 and y-coordinate = -5. Coordinates are - specified in the usual way with respect to an origin, which is - normally at the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that when a - position appears as an argument, it is not enclosed in braces; the - parentheses serve to delimit the argument. -<p> - The picture environment has one mandatory argument, which - specifies the size of the picture. The environment - produces a rectangular box with width and height determined by this - argument's two values. -<p> - The picture environment also has an optional position argument, - following the size argument, that can change the origin. (Unlike - ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not contained in square - brackets.) The optional argument gives the coordinates of the point at - the lower-left corner of the picture (thereby determining the origin). - For example, if - <a href="unitlength.html"><tt>\unitlength</tt></a> has been set to 1mm, - the command -<p> -<p><pre> - \begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20) -</pre> - produces a picture of width 100 millimeters and height 200 - millimeters, whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and whose - upper-right corner is therefore the point (110,220). - Typically one initially omits the optional argument, leaving the - origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your - picture by shifting everything, you just add the appropriate optional - argument. -<p> - The environment's mandatory argument determines the nominal size of - the picture. This need bear no relation to how large the picture - really is; LaTeX will happily allow you to put things outside the - picture, or even off the page. The picture's nominal size is used by - TeX in determining how much room to leave for it. -<p> - Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the - <a href="ltx-296.html"><tt>\put</tt></a> command. The - command -<pre> - \put (11.3,-.3){obj} -</pre> - puts the object specified by <tt>obj</tt> in the picture, with its reference - point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). The reference points for various - objects will be described below. -<p> - The <a href="ltx-296.html"><tt>\put</tt></a> - command creates an LR box. You can put anything in the text - argument of the <tt>\put</tt> command that you'd put into the argument - of an <a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a> - (or related) command. When you do this, the reference point - will be the lower left corner of the box. -<p> -See also -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-210.html"><tt>\circle</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-216.html"><tt>\dashbox</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-236.html"><tt>\frame</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-237.html"><tt>\framebox</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-257.html"><tt>\line</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-259.html"><tt>\linethickness</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-262.html"><tt>\makebox</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-269.html"><tt>\multiput</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-286.html"><tt>\oval</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-296.html"><tt>\put</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-314.html"><tt>\shortstack</tt></A> -<li><a href="unitlength.html"><tt>\unitlength</tt></a> -<li><A href="ltx-341.html"><tt>\vector</tt></A> -<p> -<li><a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a> -</ul> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 12 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-430.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-430.html deleted file mode 100644 index 6d7c78c1e97..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-430.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head> -<title>Help On LaTeX Dashes</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Dashes</font></h1> -LaTeX provides for three sizes of dashes which are indicated by -typing one, two, or three consecutive dashes in the text. -<ul> -<li>a hyphenation dash, as in X-ray, is a single dash -<li>a dash between limits, as in 1--2, is a double dash -<li>a parenthetical punctuation --- such as this --- is a triple dash -</ul> -Note that this applies to paragraph mode. In math mode each <tt>-</tt> -is interpreted as a minus sign. -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and boxes</a>, - <a href="ltx-130.html">Modes</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 11 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-431.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-431.html deleted file mode 100644 index 3dd0c9f8d0f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-431.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \<space></title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\<space></font></h1> -LaTeX normally leaves a little extra space after sentences. However, it -uses a rather simple rule for determining whether a period ends a -sentence: it assumes that periods end sentences <em>unless</em> they -follow an upper case letter. To let LaTeX know that a period does -<em>not</em> end a sentence after, for example, an abbreviation, use: -<p> - <tt>\<space></tt> -<p> -For example, -<pre> - <tt>Jones, et al.\ (1993) ...</tt> -</pre> -Such a space may also be needed after a text-producing command, -such as one defined with <a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\newcommand</tt></a>. -As an example, consider -<pre> - <tt>\newcommand{\water}{H$_2$O} - \water, \water\ everywhere, but not a drop ...</tt> -</pre> -The first <tt>\water</tt> command is terminated by the comma; -note that LaTeX does not leave a space between the first <tt>\water</tt> -and the comma -- as desired -- and the trailing space is treated as an -interword space. However, the second <tt>\water</tt> command -is terminated by the space, but LaTeX would not leave an extra space after -this, running "H<sub>2</sub>Owater" into one word, except for the -trailing <tt>\ </tt>. -<p> -An alternate way to indicate the end of a command so that a trailing -space is interpreted as an interword space is to use braces: -<pre> - <tt>\water, \water{} everywhere, ...</tt> -</pre> -<hr> -See <a href="ltx-432.html"><tt>\@.</tt></a> for the opposite case<br> -See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A>, - <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 26 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-432.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-432.html deleted file mode 100644 index 325075dc2b7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-432.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,27 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \@</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\@</font></h1> -LaTeX normally leaves a little extra space after punctuation, such as the -period which ends a sentence. However, it -uses a rather simple rule for determining whether a period ends a -sentence: it assumes that periods end sentences <em>unless</em> they -follow an upper case letter. To tell LaTeX to insert extra space after -punctuation which follows an upper case letter, precede the punctuation -by <tt>\@</tt>. -<p> -For example: -<pre> - <tt>It is I\@.</tt> -</pre> -would not be considered to be a sentence by LaTeX except for the <tt>\@</tt>. -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-431.html"><tt>\<space></tt></a> for the opposite case<br> -See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br> -Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-433.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-433.html deleted file mode 100644 index 69134f59518..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-433.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,26 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head> -<title>Help On Quotation Marks</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Quotation Marks</font></h1> -LaTeX distinguishes between left (<tt>`</tt>) and right (<tt>'</tt>) -quotation marks; the former corresponds to the "grave" generally found -to the left of the numbers at top of the keyboard, and the latter -corresponds to the usual single quote mark. -<p> -These symbols, by themselves, produce left and right single quotes. -<p> -Double quote are produced by typing two in a row: <tt>``text''</tt>. -<p> -To separate consecutive single and double quotes, use a -<a href="ltx-185.html"><tt>\,</tt></a>. -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and boxes</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-434.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-434.html deleted file mode 100644 index 3851d4499d9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-434.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head> -<title>Help Comments in file</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Comments in file</font></h1> -You can insert comments into the LaTeX input (*.tex) file. Anything following -a percent sign (<tt>%</tt>) until the end of the line is ignored by the -LaTeX processor. -<p> -In fact, the <tt>%</tt> ends a line without generating a space; -an end-of-line in LaTeX input is normally equivalent to a space. -Thus, for example, it allows one to split a word -over lines without inserting a break. For example -<pre> - <tt> this is an extr% - ordinarily long word</tt> -</pre> -would produce "this is an extraordinarily long word" with no breaks. -However, a <strong>command</strong> cannot be split over lines this way. -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-164.html">Special Characters</a>, -<a href="input.html">Input to LaTeX</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 1 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-58.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-58.html deleted file mode 100644 index d5624173888..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-58.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,60 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX tabbing</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">tabbing</font></h1> -<p><pre> - \begin{tabbing} - text \= more text \= still more text \= last text \\ - second row \> \> more \\ - .... - .... - \end{tabbing} -</pre> - The tabbing environment provides a way to align text in columns. It - works by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much the way you do - with an ordinary typewriter. -<p> - The <a href="ltx-68.html">tabular</a> environment also aligns text in - columns, but there are several important differences. - <ul> - <li> The tabular environment can be used in any <a href="ltx-130.html">mode</a> - whereas the tabbing environment can be used only in paragraph - <a href="ltx-130.html">mode</a> and it starts a new paragraph. -<p> - <li>The tabular - environment generates a box, which LaTeX treats as one (albeit very large) - letter; it cannot be split across pages. A long tabbing environment can - be split across pages. -<p> - <li>The width of columns in a tabular environment is determined automatically - by LaTeX; in the tabbing environment this is done by setting tab stops. -</ul> -<H2>Tabbing commands</H2> -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-187.html"><tt>\=</tt></A> (set tab) -<li><A href="ltx-188.html"><tt>\></tt></A> (advance to next tab stop) -<li><A href="ltx-189.html"><tt>\<</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-190.html"><tt>\+</tt></A> (indent; move margin right) -<li><A href="ltx-182.html"><tt>\-</tt></A> (unindent; move margin left) -<li><A href="ltx-191.html"><tt>\'</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-192.html"><tt>\`</tt></A> -<li><a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> (end of line; newline) -<li><A href="ltx-251.html"><tt>\kill</tt></A> (ignore preceding text; use only - for spacing) -</ul> -The <a href="ltx-241.html"><tt>\hspace</tt></a> command is useful for -controlling horizontal space in the tabbing environment. -<p> -Note that the commands <tt>\=</tt>, <tt>\'</tt>, and <tt>\`</tt> -normally produce <a href="ltx-401.html">accents</a> over the subsequent -letter. These commands are redefined in the tabbing environment; -in this environment it is possible to get the accents by using -<tt>\a=</tt>, <tt>\a'</tt>, and <tt>\a`</tt>, respectively. -</body> -<hr> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Nov 1995. -</address> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-67.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-67.html deleted file mode 100644 index eb5e016f1b1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-67.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX table</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">table</font></h1> -<p> -<p><pre> - \begin{table}[placement] - - body of the table - - <a href="caption.html">\caption{table title}</a> - \end{table} -</pre> -<p> - - Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are - usually "floated" to a convenient place, like the top of a page. - Tables will not be split between two pages. -<p> - Note that there is an *-form: <tt>\begin{table*} ... \end{table*}</tt>. - This form will put the table in a single column when in two column mode; - in one column mode it is identical to the non-* form -<p> - The optional argument [placement] determines where LaTeX will try to - place your table. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly put - a float: -<ul> -<li><TT>h</TT> Here - at the position in the text where the table - environment appears. -<li><TT>t</TT> Top - at the top of a text page. -<li><TT>b</TT> Bottom - at the bottom of a text page. -<li><TT>p</TT> Page of floats - on a separate float page, which is a page - containing no text, only floats. -</ul> - The standard report and article styles use the default placement <tt>tbp</tt>. -<p> - The body of the table is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, - etc., you wish. -<p> - The <a href="caption.html"><tt>\caption</tt></a> command allows you to title your table. -<hr> - See also <a href="ltx-68.html">tabular environment</a><br> - Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-68.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-68.html deleted file mode 100644 index 3926aafd653..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-68.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,149 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX tabular</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">tabular</font></h1> -<pre> - \begin{tabular}[pos]{cols} - column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ - ... - ... - \end{tabular} -</pre> - -or - -<pre> - \begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols} - column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ - ... - ... - \end{tabular*} -</pre> -Note that the *-form takes an additional <tt>width</tt> mandatory argument -which specifies the width of the tabular environment; in the regular form -the width is determined by LaTeX from the contents of the tabular environment. -<p> - These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of rows of - items, aligned vertically in columns. The mandatory and optional - arguments consist of: -<ul> - <li><TT>cols</TT> Specifies the column formatting. It consists of a - sequence of the following specifiers, at least one for each - of the columns. - <ul> - <li><tt>l</tt> - A column of left-aligned items. - <li><tt>r</tt> - A column of right-aligned items. - <li><tt>c</tt> - A column of centered items. - <li><tt>p{wd}</tt> - Produces a column which can be multiple lines, - with each item typeset in a parbox - of width wd. It works as if each item were the argument of a - <a href="ltx-294.html"><tt>\parbox[t]{wd}</tt></a> - command. However, a - <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> - may not appear in the item, except in - the following situations: (i) inside an environment like - minipage, array, or tabular, (ii) inside an explicit <tt>\parbox,</tt> - or (iii) in the scope of a - <a href="ltx-30.html"><tt>\centering</tt></a>, - <a href="ltx-300.html"><tt>\raggedleft</tt></a>, or - <a href="ltx-301.html"><tt>\raggedright</tt></a> - declaration. The latter declarations must appear - inside braces or an environment when used in a <tt>p</tt>-column - element. -<p> - <li><tt>|</tt> - A vertical line the full height and depth of the - environment. - <li><tt>@{text}</tt> - This inserts <tt>text</tt> in every row. - An @-expression - suppresses the intercolumn space normally inserted between - columns; any desired space between the inserted text and the - adjacent items must be included in <tt>text</tt>. - To force the spacing between two columns to be <tt>wdth</tt>, - use an <tt>@{\hspace{wdth}}</tt> between the column specifiers. - An <tt>\extracolsep{wd}</tt> - command in an @-expression causes an extra space of width <tt>wd</tt> - to appear to the left of all subsequent columns, until - countermanded by another <tt>\extracolsep</tt> command. Unlike - ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not - suppressed by an @-expression. An <tt>\extracolsep</tt> command can - be used only in an @-expression in the <tt>cols</tt> argument. - <li><tt>*{num}{cols}</tt> - Equivalent to num copies of cols, where num is - any positive integer and cols is any list of - column-specifiers, which may contain another *-expression. - </ul> -<p> - <li><TT>pos</TT> Specifies the vertical position of the whole tabular - environment (recall that it is a <a href="ltx-143.html">box</a>). - The default is to align the box on the center of the environment. - <ul> - <li><tt>t</tt> - align on top row - <li><tt>b</tt> - align on bottom row - </ul> -<p> - <li><TT>width</TT> Specifies the width of the tabular* environment. There - must be rubber space between columns that can stretch to fill out - the specified width. -</ul> - - Note that <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> - must be used to specify the end of each line of the table, except the last. - (It must be used after the last line if an - <a href="ltx-239.html"><tt>\hline</tt></a> command is used to put a line - at the bottom of the table.) - -<h2>Aligning on decimal points: an example of the @ specifier</h2> -In scientific tables it is often desirable to align the columns on a decimal -point. This can be done using the <tt>@</tt> <tt>col</tt> specifier and -breaking the number into the integral part in a right-justified column and -the fractional part in a left-justified column: -<pre> - The following input: will display as: - - <tt>\begin{tabular}{r@{.}l} - 3&14159\\ 3.14159 - 16&2\\ 16.2 - 123$456\\ \end{tabular} 123.456 </tt> -</pre> -Note that the decimal point is replaced by the column separator, <tt>&</tt> -and that the <tt>@</tt>suppresses the intercolumn space - -<h2>Another example: centering and controlling table width</h2> -LaTeX normally sets the width of the tabular environment to "natural" -width, i.e., determined from the contents of the columns. For narrow -tables it is sometimes more pleasing to make them wider. The -<tt>tabular*</tt> environments allows for setting a width; however, it -is necessary to have rubber space between colunmns that can expand to the -specified width. This can often be most easily accomplished by using -an <tt>\extracolsep{wdth}</tt> command in an @ specifier as shown in the -example below which sets the table width to 75% of the text width. -<p> -This example also centers the table. -<pre> - <tt><a href="ltx-29.html">\begin{center}</a> % put inside center environment - \begin{tabular*}{0.75<a href="textwidth.html">\textwidth</a>}% - {@{\extracolsep{<a href="ltx-238.html">\fill</a>}}cccr} - label 1 & label 2 & label 3 & label 4 \\ - <a href="ltx-239.html">\hline</a> % put a line under headers - item 1 & item 2 & item 3 & item 4 \\ - ... - \end{tabular*} - \end{center}</tt> -</pre> -<H2>See also</H2> -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-214.html">\cline</A> -<li><A href="ltx-239.html">\hline</A> -<li><A href="ltx-268.html">\multicolumn</A> -<li><A href="ltx-346.html">\vline</A> -</ul> -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-67.html">table environment</a>, - <a href="ltx-202.html">array environment</a>, - <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing environment</a>.<br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 22 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-73.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-73.html deleted file mode 100644 index f89c5573985..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-73.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,78 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX thebibliography</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">thebibliography</font></h1> -<p> -<p><pre> - \begin{thebibliography}{widest-label} - <a href="ltx-205.html">\bibitem</a>[label]{cite_key} - literature citation ... - .... - \end{thebibliography} -</pre> - The <tt>thebibliography</tt> environment produces a bibliography or reference - list. In the article style, this reference list is labeled - "References"; in the report style, it is labeled "Bibliography". -<p> -<TT>widest-label</TT> is text that, when printed, is approximately as wide - as the widest item label produced by the <tt>\bibitem</tt> command. -<p> -The <tt>thebibliography</tt> environment is similar to the -<a href="ltx-222.html"><tt>enumerate</tt></a> environment, except that -items are associated with a <a href="ltx-205.html"><tt>\bibitem</tt></a> -command and can be cross-referenced with the -<A href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></A> command. - -<h2>An example</h2> -In the text you generate a reference to the bibliographic list as follows: -<pre> - <tt> ... In the running text you might want to refer to - Dow & Jones\cite{DandJ} and then again you - might not ... </tt> -</pre> -The <A href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></a> -command will produce a sequence number by default, -or the text from the optional <tt>label</tt> argument of -<A href="ltx-205.html"><tt>\bibcite</tt></a>; this latter is useful -if the style is to use, for example, -the first three letters of the author's last name and a year, as in Dow29. -<p> -The associated item in the bibliography section at the end of the -article would be generated by -<pre> - \begin{thebibliography}{99} - .... - \bibitem{DandJ} Dow, W. \& Jones, E.A., - {<a href="ltx-249.html">\it</a> Wall Street Journal}, - March 29, 1929. - .... - \end{thebibliography} -</pre> -Note that the <tt>widest-label</tt> parameter has been set assuming less than -100 numbered items in the bibliography. Also note that the key, -<tt>DandJ</tt>, is what connects the <A href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></A> -and <A href="ltx-205.html"><tt>\bibitem</tt></A>. -<p> -If <tt>label</tt> is omitted, the numbers are generated sequentially by -the <A href="ltx-205.html"><tt>\bibitem</tt></A> commands. Many journals -want these in order of appearance in the text, so you have to sort this -list to the proper order. - -<H2>See also</H2> -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-205.html">\bibitem</A> -<li><A href="ltx-211.html">\cite</A> -<li><A href="ltx-279.html">\nocite</A> -<li><a href="ltx-222.html">Enumerate</a> environment -</ul> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 17 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> - - - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-77.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-77.html deleted file mode 100644 index c5cf895b2ef..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-77.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX theorem</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">theorem</font></h1> -<pre> - \begin{theorem} - theorem text - \end{theorem} -</pre> - The theorem environment produces "Theorem x" in boldface followed by - your theorem text. -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-78.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-78.html deleted file mode 100644 index ef866ac8c08..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-78.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX titlepage</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">titlepage</font></h1> -<pre> - \begin{titlepage} - text - \end{titlepage} -</pre> - The titlepage environment creates a title page, i.e. a page with no - printed page number or heading. It also causes the following page to - be numbered page one. Text and formatting for the title page - are left to you. -<p> - The <a href="ltx-330.html"><tt>\today</tt></a> command comes in handy for - title pages. Other useful commands include those that change - <a href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</a>, the - <a href="ltx-29.html">Centering Environment</a>, and the - <a href="ltx-420.html">Abstract Environment</a>. -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-263.html"><tt>\maketitle</tt></a> and - <a href="ltx-329.html"><tt>\title</tt></a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 Nov 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-79.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-79.html deleted file mode 100644 index 3e32e32e9ec..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-79.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX verbatim</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">verbatim</font></h1> -<p> -<p><pre> - \begin{verbatim} - text - \end{verbatim} -</pre> -or -<pre> - \begin{verbatim*} - text - \end{verbatim*} -</pre> - The <tt>verbatim</tt> environment is a paragraph-making environment - that gets - LaTeX to print exactly what you type in. It turns LaTeX into a - typewriter with carriage returns and blanks having the same effect - that they would on a typewriter. The output looks exactly as it - looks in the input file. -<p> - The difference between <tt>verbatim</tt> and <tt>verbatim*</tt> - is that the latter prints spaces as "visual" spaces, i.e., - a short, squat "u". -<p> - The only text which cannot be placed in the <tt>verbatim</tt> - environment is the 14-character sequence "\end{verbatim}". -<p> - The <tt>verbatim</tt> environment may <strong>not</strong> be used - in the argument of another command. However, it <strong>can</strong> be - placed inside a <a href="ltx-267.html">minipage environment</a> which - allows you to manipulate it's placement. -<hr> -Also see <A href="ltx-342.html">\verb</A><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 4 Dec 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-81.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-81.html deleted file mode 100644 index a2e8c47f6fa..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-81.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,20 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX verse</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">verse</font></h1> -<pre> - \begin{verse} - text - \end{verse} -</pre> - The verse environment is designed for poetry, though you may find - other uses for it. -<hr> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-82.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-82.html deleted file mode 100644 index 1fe9fb6bf71..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-82.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Footnotes</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Footnotes</font></h1> - - Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced - with one command, the <tt>\footnote</tt> command. They can also be produced - with two commands, the <tt>\footnotemark</tt> and the <tt>\footnotetext</tt> - commands. - See the specific commands, below, for information on why you would use one rather - than another. -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-231.html">\footnote</A> -<li><A href="ltx-232.html">\footnotemark</A> -<li><A href="ltx-234.html">\footnotetext</A> -<p> -<li><a href="ltx-233.html">\footnotesize</a> refers to a font size -</ul> - Note that footnotes associated with "floated objects" like - <a href="ltx-67.html">tables</a> or <a href="ltx-225.html">figures</a> - may have a problem insofar as the footnote might not follow the floated - object. This can be alleviated by putting the object inside a - <a href="ltx-267.html">minipage environment</a>. -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 22 Nov 1995. -</address> -</body></html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-86.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-86.html deleted file mode 100644 index e04c6937cb2..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-86.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,111 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Lengths</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Lengths</font></h1> -<p> - A length is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a length - as an argument. - A length of one inch is specified by typing <tt>1in</tt> or, to specify - the same length using metric units, by typing <tt>2.54cm</tt>. - -<h2>Units</h2> - LaTeX knows about the following common units. -<ul> -<li><tt>in</tt> - inches -<li><tt>mm</tt> - millimeters -<li><tt>cm</tt> - centimeters -<li><tt>pt</tt> - points (about 1/72 inch) -<li><tt>em</tt> - approximately the width of an "M" - <em>in the current font</em> -<li><tt>ex</tt> - approximately the height of an "x" - <em>in the current font</em> -</ul> - And the following less common units -<ul> -<li><tt>pc</tt> - pica (12pt/pc) -<li><tt>bp</tt> - big pt (72bp/in) -<li><tt>dd</tt> - didôt (1157dd=1238pt) -<li><tt>cc</tt> - cîcero (12dd/cc) -<li><tt>sp</tt> - scaled point (65536sp/pt) -</ul> - Lengths may also be negative, for example, <tt>-1.5em</tt>.<br> - Note that the number <tt>0</tt> by itself is not a length; - it must be specified as <tt>0in</tt> or <tt>0pt</tt>, for example.<br> - -<h2><a name="lencmd">Length commands</a></h2> - A length may also be specified by a <em>length command</em>. An example - is <tt>\parindent</tt> - whose value specifies the current width of the indentation - which begins paragraphs. Multiples of such length commands may be specified, - for example by writing <tt>2.5\parindent</tt> or <tt>-0.1\parindent</tt>. -<p> - Some length commands are -<ul> -<li><tt>\parindent</tt> - normal paragraph indentation -<li><a href="baselineskip.html"><tt>\baselineskip</tt></a> - - normal vertical distance between lines in a paragraph -<ul><li><a href="baselineskip.html"><tt>\baselinestretch</tt></a> - multiplies - <tt>\baselineskip</tt></ul> -<li><a href="parskip.html"><tt>\parskip</tt></a> - - the <strong>extra</strong> vertical space between - paragraphs -<li><a href="textwidth.html"><tt>\textwidth</tt></a> - - the width of text on the page -<li><a href="textwidth.html"><tt>\linewidth</tt></a> - - width of a line in the <strong>local</strong> - environment -<li><tt>\textheight</tt> - the height of text on the page -<li><a href="unitlength.html"><tt>\unitlength</tt></a> - units of - lenght in <a href="ltx-43.html">Picture</a> Environment -</ul> -All length commands are robust and <strong>should not</strong> be preceded -by a <tt>\protect</tt> command. - -<h2><a name="rubber">Rubber lengths</a></h2> -Most lengths have a fixed value. However, LaTeX also allows for "rubber" -lengths; these have a natural length plus a degree of elasticity. For -example, the <tt>\fill</tt> length command has a natural length of zero -but is infinitely stretchable, so that a space of width <tt>\fill</tt> will -try to stretch as much as possible. Multiplying a rubber length by a fixed -factor destroys its elasticity: <tt>0.5\fill</tt> becomes a rigid length -with a value of zero. - -<h2>Setting values for length commands</h2> -The following LaTeX commands define and manipulate the value of length -commands -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-87.html"><tt>\newlength</tt></A> - define a new length command -<p> -<li><A href="ltx-88.html"><tt>\setlength</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-89.html"><tt>\addtolength</tt></A> -<p> -<li><A href="ltx-90.html"><tt>\settowidth</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-311.html"><tt>\settoheight</tt></A> -<li><A href="ltx-312.html"><tt>\settodepth</tt></A> -</ul> - -<h2>Commands that add space</h2> -<ul> -<li>Horizontal space - <ul> - <li><a href="ltx-238.html"><tt>\hfill</tt></a> - <li><a href="ltx-241.html"><tt>\hspace</tt></a> - </ul> -<li>Vertical Space - <ul> - <li><a href="ltx-198.html"><tt>\addvspace</tt></a> - <li><a href="ltx-318.html"><tt>\smallskip</tt></a> - <li><a href="ltx-266.html"><tt>\medskip</tt></a> - <li><a href="ltx-206.html"><tt>\bigskip</tt></a> - <li><a href="ltx-345.html"><tt>\vfill</tt></a> - <li><a href="ltx-347.html"><tt>\vspace</tt></a> - </ul> -</ul> -<hr> -Back to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Oct 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-87.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-87.html deleted file mode 100644 index d0cfcc367d2..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-87.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newlength</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newlength</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\newlength{\gnat}</tt> -<p> - - The <tt>\newlength</tt> command defines the mandatory argument, <tt>\gnat</tt>, - as a - length command with a value of 0in. An error occurs if a <tt>\gnat</tt> - command already exists. -<hr> -See <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-88.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-88.html deleted file mode 100644 index 54623e8ddb3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-88.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,22 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \setlength</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\setlength</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\setlength{len-cmd}{len}</tt> -<p> - - The <tt>\setlength</tt> command is used to set the value of a length command, - <tt>len-cmd</tt>, which is specified as the first argument. - The <tt>len</tt> argument can be expressed in any terms of length LaTeX - understands, i.e., inches (in), millimeters (mm), points (pt), etc. - -<hr> -See <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 9 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-89.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-89.html deleted file mode 100644 index f6b77694576..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-89.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,27 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \addtolength</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\addtolength</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\addtolength{len-cmd}{len}</tt> -<p> - - The <tt>\addtolength</tt> command increments a - <a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">length command</a>, - <tt>len-cmd</tt>, which is specified by the first argument, by the amount - specified in the <tt>len</tt> argument. It can be a negative amount. -<p> -As an example, -<pre> - <tt>\addtolength{<a href="parskip.html">\parskip</a>}{-.1\parskip}</tt> -</pre> -decreases the value of <tt>\parskip</tt> by 10%. -<hr> -See <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 9 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-90.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-90.html deleted file mode 100644 index ee987ef0a6a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-90.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \settowidth</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\settowidth</font></h1> -<p> - <tt>\settowidth{len-cmd}{text}</tt> -<p> - - The <tt>\settowidth</tt> command sets the value of a - <a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">length command</a>, <tt>len-cmd</tt>, - which is specified as the first argument, equal to - the width of the <tt>text</tt> argument in the current font. -<hr> -See <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 9 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-91.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-91.html deleted file mode 100644 index 1aaa58df93a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-91.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,78 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Letters</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Letters</font></h1> - You can use LaTeX to typeset letters, both personal and business. The - letter document style is designed to make a number of letters at once, - although you can make just one if you so desire. -<p> - Your *.tex source file has the same - <a href="input.html#structure">minimum commands</a> as the other - document styles, i.e., you must have the following commands as a - minimum: -<pre> - <tt>\documentstyle{letter} - <a href="ltx-315.html">\signature{Your Name}</a> - <a href="ltx-93.html">\address{Return address}</a> - \begin{document} - ... First letter ... - ... Second letter ... - ... - \end{document}</tt> -</pre> -Note that the <tt>\address</tt> and <tt>\signature</tt> commands are -<a href="declarations.html">declarations</a> and follow the usual -scope rules. They are generally placed in the preamble, as indicated here, -and apply to all letters in the file. -<p> - Each letter is a letter <a href="ltx-27.html">environment</a>, - whose argument is the name and - address of the recipient. For example, a typical letter might have<pre> - <tt>\begin{letter}{Mr. John Doe \\ 2345 Jones St. - \\ Oakland, CA 91123} - <a href="ltx-97.html">\opening{Dear John,}</a> - ... - text of letter - ... - <a href="ltx-98.html">\closing{Best regards,}</a> - \end{letter}</tt> -</pre> - The letter itself begins with the - <a href="ltx-97.html"><tt>\opening</tt></a> command. The text of the - letter follows. It is typed as ordinary LaTeX input. Commands that - make no sense in a letter, like <tt>\chapter,</tt> don't work. The letter - closes with a - <a href="ltx-98.html"><tt>\closing</tt></a> command. -<h2>Closing matter</h2> - Several commands may be used after the <tt>\closing</tt> command: -<ul> -<li><tt>\ps{PS text}</tt> command produces a "P.S." -<li><tt>\cc{text}</tt> command produces the usual "cc: text". -<li><tt>\encl{list of enclosures}</tt> command produces an "encl:" list -</ul> -<h2>Date</h2> -The <a href="ltx-330.html"><tt>\today</tt></a> command is used by the -letter <a href="ltx-22.html">document style</a> to generate the date. -If you wish a fixed date, rather than the current date, you should use<pre> - <tt><a href="ltx-18.html">\renewcommand</a>{\today}{Month day, year}</tt> -</pre> -This may be put in the preamble if it is to apply to all letters in the -file, or just before the <tt>\opening</tt> command if it is to apply to -just that letter. -<hr> -See also -<ul> -<li><a href="ltx-93.html"><tt>\address</tt></a> -<li><A href="ltx-98.html"><tt>\closing</tt></A> -<li><a href="ltx-261.html"><tt>\location</tt></a> -<li><A href="ltx-97.html"><tt>\opening</tt></A> -<li><a href="ltx-315.html"><tt>\signature</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-323.html"><tt>\telephone</tt></a> -</ul> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 24 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-93.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-93.html deleted file mode 100644 index 28fcacada52..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-93.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,22 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \address</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\address</font></h1> -<tt>\address{Return address}</tt> -<p> - The return address, as it should appear on the letter and the - envelope. Separate lines of the address should be separated by -<a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> - commands. If you do not make an <tt>\address</tt> declaration, then the - letter will be formatted for copying onto your organization's - standard letterhead. If you give an <tt>\address</tt> declaration, then the - letter will be formatted as a personal letter. -<hr> -See <a href="ltx-91.html">Letters</a><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Apr 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-97.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-97.html deleted file mode 100644 index 226af36881b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-97.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,20 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \opening</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\opening</font></h1> - <tt>\opening{text}</tt> -<p> - The letter begins with the <tt>\opening</tt> command. The mandatory argument, - <tt>text</tt>, is what ever text you wish to start your letter, for example: -<pre> - <tt>\opening{Dear John,}</tt> -</pre> -</body> -<hr> -See <a href="ltx-91.html">Letters</a><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 24 Jun 1995. -</address> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-98.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-98.html deleted file mode 100644 index e505cb235b9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-98.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,23 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \closing</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\closing</font></h1> - <tt>\closing{text}</tt> -<p> - The letter closes with a <tt>\closing</tt> command, where the -mandatory argument, <tt>text</tt> is the desired text, for example: -<pre> - <tt>\closing{Sincerely yours,}</tt> -</pre> -The signature will be taken from the -<a href="ltx-315.html"><tt>\signature</tt></a> declaration. -<hr> -See <a href="ltx-91.html">Letters</a><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 24 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-99.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-99.html deleted file mode 100644 index c83b00674c1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-99.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX Line and Page Breaking</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Line and Page Breaking</font></h1> - The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is to - translate your input file into a string of glyphs and spaces. To - produce a printed document, this string must be broken into lines, and - these lines must be broken into pages. In some environments, you do - the line breaking yourself with the <tt>\\</tt> command, but LaTeX usually does - it for you. - -<H2>Commands for line and page breaks</H2> -<ul> -<li><A href="ltx-181.html">\\</A> -<li><A href="ltx-182.html">\-</A> -<li><A href="ltx-244.html">\hyphenation</A> -<p> -<li><A href="ltx-212.html">\cleardoublepage</A> -<li><A href="ltx-213.html">\clearpage</A> -<p> -<li><A href="ltx-275.html">\newline</A> -<li><A href="ltx-258.html">\linebreak</A> -<li><A href="ltx-281.html">\nolinebreak</A> -<li><A href="ltx-276.html">\newpage</A> -<li><A href="ltx-289.html">\pagebreak</A> -<li><A href="ltx-283.html">\nopagebreak</A> -</ul> - -</body> -<hr> -For page numbering, see <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br> -To refer to a page number in the text, see - <a href="ltx-291.html"><tt>\pageref</tt></a><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 20 Oct 1995. -</address> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-tar.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-tar.html deleted file mode 100644 index ddb8132efbe..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-tar.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,102 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head> -<title>Hypertext LaTeX Help files</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" -text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> - -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Hypertext LaTeX Help files</font></h1> - -<p>If you find Hypertext Help with LaTeX to be useful, you are welcome to -obtain the complete set of files and install them on your own machine. -Retrieval and installation instructions are given below. -They may be installed for use either with a webserver, which -will ease network traffic and probably give you faster access, -or they may be installed as local files which may be "read" -with an HTML viewer, such as Mosaic, Cello, Lynx, Netscape, etc. -without the necessity of a network connection.</p> - -<p>To facilitate off-network usage, -the files generally have only local (within the same directory) hypertext -links. All links to "external" URLs, including much LaTeX information -available on the Web, have been restricted to one file in this set other than -the current one.</p> - -<p>Although it is not required, if you make these files available on a public -Web server, please send a note to -<a href="mailto:webmaster@giss.nasa.gov">webmaster@giss.nasa.gov</a> -so that we can add you to the list of -<a href="mirror.html">mirror sites</a>.</p> - - -<hr> - -<p>The files are available via anonymous ftp as a -<a href="ftp://ftp.giss.nasa.gov/pub/sgreen/latex/latex.tar.Z">Unix-compressed -tar file</a> (about 125 KByte) or -<a href="ftp://ftp.giss.nasa.gov/pub/sgreen/latex/latex.tar.gz">gzipped -tar file</a> (about 85 KByte). -Your Web browser can probably retrieve the files via the above link, or they -can be retrieved by anonymous ftp to ftp.giss.nasa.gov. -Login as anonymous and give your e-mail address as the password, -then switch to binary mode and download the file by issuing the -commands:</p> - -<pre> - bin - cd pub/sgreen/latex - get filename.tar.Z -</pre> - -<p>or</p> - -<pre> - bin - cd pub/sgreen/latex - get filename.tar.gz -</pre> - -<p>After downloading the file on your local machine, issue the -Unix commands:</p> - -<pre> - uncompress filename.tar.Z - tar -xf filename.tar -</pre> - -or - -<pre> - gunzip filename.tar.gz - tar -xf filename.tar -</pre> - - -<p>(Note: some Web software, such as Mosaic, will automatically -uncompress the file after retrieving it, in which case save it as -<code>filename.tar</code> and execute only the <code>tar -xf</code> -line above.) This will create a subdirectory named -<code>latex</code> in your current directory which contains the complete -set of html files and which requires about 1 MByte of disk space. -The "Introduction" file is <code>index.html</code> and the Table of -Contents page is <code>ltx-2.html</code>. </p> - -<p>You may rename or move the entire <code>latex</code> subdirectory -if desired; all file references are local to this directory so links -should continue to work.</p> - -<hr> - -<ul> - <li><a href="index.html">Back to the Introduction</a> - <li><a href="ltx-2.html">On to the Table of Contents</a> -</ul> - -<hr> - -<address> -Page revised: 1998-05-21, RBS -</address> - -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/mathfonts.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/mathfonts.html deleted file mode 100644 index e5b78af08ee..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/mathfonts.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,87 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX math fonts and styles</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Math fonts and styles</font></h1> - -<h2>Math styles</h2> -The following applies to both LaTeX 2.09 and LaTeX2e. -<p> -There are four styles used in typesetting <a href="ltx-115.html">math -formulas</a> which affect the size and certain formatting parameters -(notably the placement of sub and superscripts on <a href="ltx-408.html"> -variable size symbols</a>). -<ul> -<li><tt>\textstyle</tt> - default in the running text and in - <a href="ltx-202.html">array</a> environment -<li><tt>\displaystyle</tt> - default for displayed equations -<li><tt>\scriptstyle</tt> - default for first-level sub and superscripts -<li><tt>\scriptscriptstyle</tt> - default for higher-level sub and superscripts -</ul> -All four of these may be used in math mode as -<a href="declarations.html">declarations</a> to <strong>force</strong> the -type size and formatting to a style other than what would normally be used. -<p> -For example, to get a superscript that is the same size as the running text: -<pre> <tt>$e^{\textstyle -E/kT}</tt>$ </pre> -<p> -As another example, the limits on a summation symbol are normally placed -below and above the symbol in <tt>display</tt> style and in normal sub and -superscript position in <tt>textstyle</tt>. One could <strong>force</strong> -the below/above placement in running text by using: -<pre> <tt>\displaystyle $<a href="ltx-408.html">\sum</a>_{n=0}^<a href="ltx-407.html">\infty</a> x_n$</tt></pre> -although it should be noted that this might cause LaTeX to leave extra -space between the text lines which might not be desirable. - -<h2>LaTeX 2.09 fonts</h2> -The regular <a href="ltx-177.html">type style</a> declarations can be -used in <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math mode</a>. -They affect only letters (including upper case <a href="ltx-405.html">Greek</a> -letters) but not symbols -(or lower case <a href="ltx-405.html">Greek</a> letters). Two additional style -<a href="declarations.html">declarations</a> which can be used -<strong>only</strong> in math mode are -<ul> -<li><tt>\mit</tt> -<li><tt><a href="ltx-407.html">\cal</a></tt> -</ul> -The former is math italic style; it spaces letters as if they were words, -however, not as if they were each separate math symbols. -The latter produces upper case calligraphic letters. - -<h2>LaTeX2e math fonts</h2> -The following <a href="declarations.html">declarations</a> change the style -only of letters, numbers, and uppercase <a href="ltx-405.html">Greek</a>. -<ul> -<li><tt>\mathit</tt> - same as <tt>\mit</tt> in 2.09 (see above) -<li><tt>\mathrm</tt> - Roman -<li><tt>\mathbf</tt> - Bold face -<li><tt>\mathsf</tt> - San Serif -<li><tt>\mathtt</tt> - Typewriter style -<li><tt><a href="ltx-407.html">\mathcal</a></tt> - Calligraphic -</ul> -All of these produce spacing appropriate for text; they do not interpret each -letter as a separate math symbol. -<p> -The <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a> declaration causes -everything (including symbols) in a formula to be in a bold font. -Note that this differs somewhat from the same declaration in 2.09 which -did not affect some symbols. -<hr> -Related topics -<ul> -<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a> -<li><a href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</a> - <ul><li><a href="ltx-177.html">Styles</a> - <li><a href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</a> - <li><a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e fonts</a> - </ul> -<li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size symbols</a> -<li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a> -</ul> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/mirror.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/mirror.html deleted file mode 100644 index fd87330c1bf..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/mirror.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,125 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Hypertext Help with LaTeX - Mirror Sites</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> - -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br> -<font color="#cc0000">Mirror Sites</font></h1> - -<p>Copies of <strong>Hypertext Help with LaTeX</strong> are available -from several other Web sites which might provide faster access depending -on your location. -However, these files may not be quite as up-to-date as the original files at -<a href="http://www.giss.nasa.gov/latex/">NASA Goddard Institute for -Space Studies, New York, NY, USA</a>.</p> - -<p>The following mirror sites were last verified on December 3, 1998. -Please contact -<a href="mailto:webmaster@giss.nasa.gov">webmaster@giss.nasa.gov</a> -if you discover that one of these sites is no longer available or -if you know of additional sites that should be listed.</p> - - -<dl> - -<dt><b>Australia</b> -<dd><a href="http://ecco.bsee.swin.edu.au/text/hyperlatex/">Swinburne - University of Technology</a> - <!-- verified 19981203 --> - -<dt><b>Brazil</b> -<dd><a href="http://www.cos.ufrj.br/~gabriel/latex/">Universidade Federal - do Rio de Janeiro</a> - <!-- verified 19981203 --> - -<dt><b>Canada</b> -<dd><a href="http://www.cs.ualberta.ca/~vladimir/latex/">Dept. Of Computing - Science, University of Alberta</a> - <!-- verified 19981203 --> - -<dd><a href="http://sault.qucis.queensu.ca/wright/latex/">Dept. Of Computing - and Information Science, Queen's University</a> - <!-- verified 19981203 --> - -<dt><b>Chile</b> -<dd><a href="http://www.dim.uchile.cl/documents/giss-latex/">Departamento - de Ingeniería Matemática, Universidad de Chile</a> - <!-- verified 19981203 --> - -<dt><b>Denmark</b> -<dd><a href="http://www.astro.ku.dk/help/LaTeX/">Niels Bohr Institute for - Astronomy, Physics and Geophysics, University of Copenhagen</a> - <small>(May 1995 copy)</small> - <!-- verified 19981203 --> - -<dt><b>Germany</b> -<dd><a href="http://www-ti.informatik.uni-tuebingen.de/~frech/latex/">Arbeitsbereich - Technische Informatik, University of Tübingen</a> - <!-- verified 19981203 --> - -<dt><b>India</b> -<dd><a href="http://www.aero.iitm.ernet.in/dcf/LaTeX/">Indian Institute - of Technology, Madras</a> - <!-- verified 19981203 --> - -<dt><b>Ireland</b> -<dd><a href="http://www.eeng.dcu.ie/local-docs/latex-help/">School of - Electonic Engineering, Dublin City University</a> - <!-- verified 19981203 --> - -<!-- not responding 19981203 -<dt><b>Mexico</b> -<dd><a href="http://ixmati.uam.mx/comp/LaTeX/LaTeXHelp">UAM-Iztapalapa</a> ---> - -<!-- not responding 19981203 -<dt><b>Netherlands</b> -<dd><a href="http://www.fys.ruu.nl/~fange/LaTeX/">Universiteit Utrecht</a> ---> - -<dt><b>Norway</b> -<dd><a href="http://mitra.phys.uit.no/edb/latex/">University of - Tromsø</a> - <small>(May 1995 copy)</small> - <!-- verified 19981203 --> - -<dt><b>Poland</b> -<dd><a href="http://zon8.physd.amu.edu.pl/LaTeX/">Institute of Physics, - Adam Mickiewicz University</a> - <small>(November 1995 copy)</small> - <!-- verified 19981203 --> - -<dt><b>Portugal</b> -<dd><a href="http://www.astro.up.pt/LaTeX/">Center for Astrophysics, - University of Porto</a> - <!-- verified 19981203 --> - -<dt><b>Russia</b> -<dd><a href="http://www.izmiran.rssi.ru/doc/latex/">Institute of - Terrestrial Magnetism, Ionosphere and Radiowave Propagation</a> - <!-- verified 19981203 --> - -<dt><b>Sweden</b> -<dd><a href="http://www.ce.chalmers.se/~case/Help/LaTeX/">Dept. - of Computer Engineering, Chalmers University of Technology</a> - <!-- verified 19981203 --> - -<dt><b>Switzerland</b> -<dd><a href="http://www.ee.ethz.ch/isg/tardis/soft/latex/green/">Dept. - of Electrical Engineering, Federal Institute of Technology</a> - <!-- verified 19981203 --> - -<dt><b>United States</b> -<dd><a href="http://www.giss.nasa.gov/latex/">NASA Goddard Institute - for Space Studies</a> - -</dl> - -<hr> - -<address> -Page revised: 1998-12-03, RBS -</address> - -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/parskip.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/parskip.html deleted file mode 100644 index 0f22ae706d1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/parskip.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,27 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \parskip</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" -text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> - -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\parskip</font></h1> -<tt>\parskip</tt> is the extra vertical space inserted before a -paragraph. It has a natural length of zero but should be a -<a href="ltx-86.html#rubber">rubber length</a> so that it may -be stretched in a -<a href="ltx-227.html">flushbottom</a> environment. -<p> -To increase <tt>\parskip</tt> to skip a line between paragraphs one -could use -<pre> - <tt><a href="ltx-89.html">\addtolength</a>{<a href="parskip.html">\parskip</a>}{<a href="baselineskip.html">\baselineskip}</a></tt> -</pre> -<hr> -See also: <A href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</A><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Oct 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/refs.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/refs.html deleted file mode 100644 index b8d15e4f741..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/refs.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,53 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>LaTeX Reference Books</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">LaTeX Reference Books</font></h1> - - -<p The standard reference source for LaTeX is -<cite>A Document Preparation System: LaTeX</cite>, -by Leslie Lamport, ISBN 0-201-52983-1, published -jointly by the American Mathematical Society and Addison-Wesley -Publishing Company. The 2nd edition, 1994, describes LaTeX2e, the -second widely distributed version of LaTeX. The first edition of this -book, which appeared in 1985, described LaTeX 2.09.</p> - -<p>The standard reference for what goes on inside TeX is -<cite>The TeXbook</cite> -by Donald E. Knuth, ISBN 0-201-13448-9, published jointly by -the American Mathematical Society and Addison-Wesley.</p> - -<p>M. Goossens, F. Mittelbach, and A. Samarin, -<cite>The LaTeX Companion</cite>, published -by Addison-Wesley, ISBN 0-201-54199-8 (essential for the serious -LaTeX hackers).</p> - -<p>L. Botway and C. Biemesderfer, -<cite>LaTeX Command Summary</cite>, published by -the TeX Users Group, Providence, RI is a good companion.</p> - -<p>A. Diller, -<cite>LaTeX Line by Line</cite>, published by Wiley.</p> - -<p>N. Walsh, -<cite><a href="http://www.ora.com/catalog/tex/">Making TeX Work</a></cite>, -published by O'Reilly & Associates, ISBN 1-56592-051-1.</p> - -<hr> - -<p>Other information is available <a href="externals.html">on the Web</a>.</p> - -<hr> - -<p>Back to the <a href="index.html">Introduction</a><br> -Go to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a></p> - -<hr> - -<address> -Revised: RBS, 20 February 1997<br> -Thanks to Anthony Stone (Cambridge) for suggestions. -</address> - -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/stackrel.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/stackrel.html deleted file mode 100644 index 1ae9cb1bc03..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/stackrel.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,90 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \stackrel and \mathop</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\stackrel</font></h1> -<p> -This can be used to stack something above something else; used in math mode. -<pre> - <tt>\stackrel{top}{bot}</tt> -</pre> -The first argument, <tt>top</tt>, is typset immediately above the -second argument, <tt>bot</tt>; the former is set in the same -math style as a superscript. -<p> -For example -<pre> - <tt>H$_2$CO$_3$ $\stackrel{<a href="ltx-304.html">\rm</a> heat} - {<a href="ltx-406.html">\longrightarrow}</a>$ H$_2$O + CO$_2$</tt> -</pre> -will produce something like -<pre><tt> - heat - H CO ------> H O + CO - 2 3 2 2 -</tt></pre> -Note that the the <a href="ltx-304.html"><tt>\rm</tt></a> declaration is used -so that "heat" is set in Roman face and not math italics. -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br>a name="mathop">\mathop</a></h1> -This command does not seem to be well documented but appears to work, -at least in current versions of LaTeX 2.09. -<p> -The argument is considered to be a single <a href="ltx-408.html">variable -sized math symbol</a> for purposes of placing limits below -(<a href="ltx-179.html">subscripts</a>) and above -(<a href="ltx-180.html">superscripts</a>) in -<a href="mathfonts.html">display math</a> style. For example, -<pre> - <tt>\mathop{\sum \sum}_{i,j=1}^{N} a_i a_j</tt> -</pre> -would produce something like -<pre> - N - --- --- - \ \ - / / a a - --- --- i j - i,j -</pre> -It is possible to create <strong>two rows</strong> of "subscripts" by using -a similar construction: The first row is created as subscripts of the symbol -in the usual way and a lower row is created by placing this whole construct -as the argument of a <tt>\mathop</tt> command with its own subscript. For -example -<pre> - <tt>\mathop{\sum_{i,j=1}^{N}}_{i>j}</tt> -</pre> -would produce something like -<pre> - N - --- - \ - / - --- - i,j=1 - i>j -</pre> - -<hr> -Related topics -<ul> -<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a> - and <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a> -<li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a> -<li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational opertors</a> -<li><a href="ltx-223.html">Eqnarray Environment</a> -<li><a href="ltx-224.html">Equation Environment</a> -<li><a href="ltx-421.html">Displaymath Environment</a> -<li><a href="mathfonts.html">Math Fonts and Styles</a> -<p> -<li><a href="ltx-287.html"><tt>\overbrace</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-288.html"><tt>\overline</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-335.html"><tt>\underbrace</tt></a> -<li><a href="ltx-336.html"><tt>\underline</tt></a> -</ul> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 15 Aug 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/textwidth.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/textwidth.html deleted file mode 100644 index 912c11d74be..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/textwidth.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \textwidth \linewidth</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\textwidth \linewidth</font></h1> -<tt>\textwidth</tt> is the normal width of the text on a page. It should -generally be changed only in the <a href="input.html#structure">preamble</a>. -<p> -<tt>\linewidth</tt> is the width of lines in the current environment. Normally -equal to <tt>\textwidth</tt>, it may be different within an environment such -as <a href="lists.html">list</a> or -<a href="ltx-298.html">quote</a> environments. -<hr> -See also: <A href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</A><br> -Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/toc.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/toc.html deleted file mode 100644 index 5f975e1a36f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/toc.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,26 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \tableofcontents</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\tableofcontents</font></h1> -<p> - A table of contents is produced with the - <tt>\tableofcontents</tt> command. You - put the command right where you want the table of contents to go; - LaTeX does the rest for you. - Entries are taken from the <a href="ltx-141.html">Sectioning</a> commands. -<p> - <tt>\tableofcontents</tt> produces a heading, but it does not - automatically start a new page. If you want a new page after the - table of contents, include a - <a href="ltx-276.html"><tt>\newpage</tt></a> command after the - <tt>\tableofcontents</tt> command. -<p> -<hr> -See also <a href="ltx-170.html">Table of Contents</a><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/trivlist.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/trivlist.html deleted file mode 100644 index e73e8d4ba85..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/trivlist.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX trivlist</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">trivlist</font></h1> -<p> -<p><pre> - <tt>\begin{trivlist} - \item First item - .... - \end{trivlist}</tt> -</pre> -This is ike the <a href="ltx-260.html">List Environment</a>, but -uses the currently defined values of -list-making parameters. It is normally used to define an environment with a -single item, with an <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command -as part of the environment definition. -<hr> -See <a href="lists.html">Lists</a>, - <a href="ltx-260.html">List Environment</a>, - <a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a><br> -Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 1 Jun 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> - - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/unitlength.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/unitlength.html deleted file mode 100644 index f1bd14691d4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/unitlength.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head><title>Help On LaTeX \unitlength</title></head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\unitlength</font></h1> - <tt>\unitlength</tt> -<p> - The <tt>\unitlength</tt> command is a <a href="ltx-86.html">Length - command</a>. It defines the units used in the - <a href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</a> -<p> -The default value is 1 point (approximately 1/72 inch) but it may -be changed using the <a href="ltx-88.html"><tt>\setlength</tt></a> -command. -<hr> -See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>, - <A href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</A><br> -See also <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br> -Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a> -<hr> -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 12 May 1995. -</address> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/versions.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/versions.html deleted file mode 100644 index 922e5070f98..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/versions.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,83 +0,0 @@ -<html> -<head> -<title>LaTeX 2.09 and LaTeX2e</title> -</head> -<body bgcolor="#ffffff" -text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000"> - -<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br> -<font color="#cc0000">LaTeX 2.09 and LaTeX2e</font></h1> - -<p>The following information is excerpted from "A Document Preparation System: -LaTeX" by Leslie Lamport, 2nd edition and/or "LaTeX2e for authors", -by the LaTeX3 Project Team, June 1994.</p> - -<p>LaTex2e was produced in an attempt to reconcile the various, sometimes -incompatble, "flavors" of LaTeX which were developing. Some of these -included the New Font Selection Scheme (NFSS), SLITeX (for slides), -AASTeX (the American Astronomical Society macros), etc. The major -change to LaTeX2e is the method for trying to make the use of add-on -packages more uniform by the introduction of "classes" -and "packages." Most of the new commands are the "initial" commands, -i.e., those which can appear only <em>before</em> the -<tt>\documentclass</tt> command.</p> - -<p>A few standard LaTeX commands have been modified and a few new commands -added, notably:</p> - -<ul> - <li><a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\newcommand</tt></a> (and related) commands, - which now allow for an optional argument in newly defined commands - <li><a href="ensuremath.html"><tt>\ensuremath</tt></a> -</ul> - - -<h2>Document Styles and Style Options</h2> - -<p>In LaTeX2e, documents begin with a <tt>\documentclass</tt> command. This -replaces the LaTeX 2.09 -<a href="ltx-22.html"><tt>\documentstyle</tt></a> command. The -<tt>\usepackage</tt> command has been added and is used in conjunction -with <tt>\documentclass</tt>.</p> - -<p> aTeX2e still understands the old -<a href="ltx-22.html"><tt>\documentstyle</tt></a> command; if it is -encountered, LaTex2e enters <em>compatibility -mode</em> in which most 2.09 input files should still be processed properly.</p> - - -<h2>Type Styles and Sizes</h2> - -<p>LaTeX 2.09 commands for changing type style, for example, <tt>\tt</tt>, -still work similarly in LaTeX2e. -The major difference is that <tt>\sc</tt> and <tt>\sl</tt> -can no longer be used in math mode (except when LaTeX2e is in -<em>compatibility mode</em>, see above).</p> - -<p>However, <a href="fonts2e.html">a new set of commands</a> -have been added to allow separate (and independent) specification of </p> - -<ul> - <li>Shape - <li>Series - <li>Family -</ul> - -<p>These can be combined to form a wide variety of type styles. If a style -you specify is not available on your computer, LaTeX2e produce a warning -message and will substitute a style it thinks is similar.</p> - -<hr> - -<p>Return to the <a href="index.html">Introduction</a><br> -Go to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a></p> - -<hr> - -<address> -Revised: Sheldon Green, 14 May 1995. -</address> - - -</body> -</html> diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-documentation-english.tlpsrc b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-documentation-english.tlpsrc index 18a8d151d49..4160b4eac2d 100644 --- a/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-documentation-english.tlpsrc +++ b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-documentation-english.tlpsrc @@ -19,7 +19,6 @@ depend Documentation/knuth depend Documentation/l2tabu-english depend Documentation/latex-graphics-companion depend Documentation/latex-web-companion -depend Documentation/latex2e-html depend Documentation/lshort-english depend Documentation/make-tex-work depend Documentation/math-into-latex diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/latex2e-html.tlpsrc b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/latex2e-html.tlpsrc deleted file mode 100644 index a1fca8a77ac..00000000000 --- a/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/latex2e-html.tlpsrc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,2 +0,0 @@ -name latex2e-html -category Documentation |